JP2020022874A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game using music output during a period when at least a game is performed.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area provided in a game board; detection means for detecting passage of the game ball when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area; putout means for putting out a predetermined number of game balls to a player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area; output means for outputting music during a period when at least a game is performed by the player; determination means for determining timing of beats of the music output by the output means; setting means for setting sound production of a notification sound for giving a notice of the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area on the basis of a fact that the detection means has detected the passage of the game ball through the predetermined area; and sound production means for producing the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beats of the music.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as a variable effect (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1). While such an effect is being performed, background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine, further enhancing the interest of the game.

JP 2001-046635 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machines, the background music is rarely interesting and does not contribute much to the interest in the gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by using music output at least during a period in which the game is being performed. The purpose is.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a determination means for making a determination when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display of identification information on a display means based on a determination result by the determination means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A game board, a firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area provided on the game board, and a game ball passing through a predetermined area provided in the game area. Detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball, and payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, at least the player Is played by Output means for outputting music during the period, a judgment means for judging the rhythm of the music output by the output means, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, Setting means for setting sounding of a notification sound for notifying the passing of the game ball in the predetermined area; and determining the notification sound set by the setting means when the game state is a predetermined game state, Sounding means for sounding in accordance with the rhythm of the music determined by the means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, determination means for making a determination when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and dynamic display execution for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means Means for providing a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Board, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area provided on the game board, and when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided on the game area, the passing of the game ball is performed. Detecting means for detecting, payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area, and at least the game by the player is performed Output music during the period Output means, a judgment means for judging the rhythm of the music outputted by the output means, and a detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. Setting means for setting sounding of a notification sound for notifying the passage; and when the game state is a predetermined game state, the notification sound set by the setting means, the music determined by the determination means. And a sound generating means for generating a sound in accordance with the rhythm of the game, so that the fun of the game can be improved by using at least the music output during the period in which the game is being performed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of the first accessory, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a jackpot variation pattern table. FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and FIG. 4E is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (probable) fluctuation pattern table. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first character. 6 is a timing chart showing an effect execution timing when a detailed fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-run as an example of a fluctuation effect. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table for change typically. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of an additional data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of sound edit / output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of sound edit / output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of start winning prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of start winning prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the figure which showed the sounding timing of the ball entry sound when the ball entered the first ball entry port one by one during one beat of BGM. (A) is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three balls enter the first entrance during one beat of BGM, and (b) is a diagram showing one of the BGM. The incoming sound when two balls enter the first entrance during the beat and another one enters the first entrance before the next backbeat FIG. 9C is a diagram for explaining the sounding timing of (a), (c) shows that one ball enters the first entrance port during one beat of the BGM, and further reaches the back beat of the next one beat. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the sounding timing of the incoming sound when two balls enter the first entrance. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending ball count command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a fixed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 4C is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a stop type command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a suspended image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a part of sound edit / output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of start winning prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table for change typically. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a detailed variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of sound edit / output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of sound edit / output processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of start winning prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of start winning prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed a part of display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a part of starting winning a prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a part of start winning prize sound output processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 43. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity, and is accompanied by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start-start prize) described later. Various productions such as fluctuation productions and reach productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “town stage” with a town motif, a “sea stage” with a sea motif, a “mountain stage” with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  In addition, when the normal reach effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal reach. It is configured as follows. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the illumination part 32 on the right side, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information.

  The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance opening (starting opening) 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the fluctuation is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning), or a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. A symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball (reserved ball) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not, and if the jackpot is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. . As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability-change jackpot, a 2R probability-change jackpot, and a time-saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and "2R probability variable jackpot" means a maximum round number of two rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to the low-probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and changes to the time-saving state for a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. In the high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment, the hitting probability of a second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later increases, and the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened. Includes a game state in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 by being easy.

  On the other hand, the “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of change is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of hit is lower than that in the case of probability change. In the “low probability state”, the time reduction state (medium time reduction) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol (normal symbol) increases while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a state of a game in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 because the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened.

  In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened, or the time of one hit in the second symbol The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed. For example, the time-saving state or the high-probability state of the low-probability state may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is longer than other game states. In addition, the time-saving state or the high-probability state of the low-probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the electric accessory in one time in the second symbol is larger than that in other game states.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of a third symbol while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and an LED that variably displays the second symbol (normal symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a first accessory 87 that is a movable accessory for a notice effect.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size. The display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 6 and 12), which will be described later. And the right three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the first symbol display device 37. Decorative display is performed according to. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed by the third symbol display device 81. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. When shifting to the high probability state (probable variation state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (“high probability design” and “probable variation design”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols (“low-probability symbols”, “normal symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are added are aligned.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. For example, a notice effect is performed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one mode of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) into the first entrance hole 64, one fluctuation display The so-called “pseudo-run” in which the pseudo fluctuation of the third symbol is performed a plurality of times in succession is configured. The “pseudo ream” is a kind of announcement effect that indicates a degree of expectation to be a big hit as a result of the fluctuating display in which the fake ream is executed. (Simulation fluctuation) is repeatedly performed, and a fluctuation effect is performed.

  In the “pseudo series”, as the number of repetitions of the pseudo stop and re-variation performed during the one fluctuation display (that is, the number of times the pseudo fluctuation is continuously performed) increases, a big hit is given after the fluctuation display. The number of repetitions is determined so as to increase expectations. As a result, as the pseudo fluctuation is repeatedly performed during one fluctuation display, the player can feel that the possibility of a big hit increases. Therefore, by performing the fluctuating effect by the “pseudo-run”, the interest in the game for the player can be increased.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12, etc., are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-shaped movable accessory in a front view of the game area, and is used for a notice effect. The first accessory 87 is normally located at the origin position as an initial position, is stored inside the upper part of the center frame 86, and is invisible to the player. Then, when a notice effect is provided by the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 operates as follows.

  That is, at an arbitrary timing of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, when the first accessory 87 descends from the center frame 86 and reaches a certain position, it moves up and down. When the fluctuation effect is a big hit, after the first accessory 87 moves up and down, it descends to the maximum descending position (maximum point position), and rotates clockwise (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2) of the game area in a front view. By operating, a notice effect (so-called one-shot notice effect) for giving a notice of a big hit in the variable effect is performed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is lost, the first accessory 87 does not fall to the maximum point position after moving up and down, but rises and is stored again inside the upper portion of the center frame 86. Thereby, while the first accessory 87 is moving up and down, the first accessory 87 can be lowered to the maximum point position and the player can be expected to be a big hit, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Can be. Further, when the first accessory 87 descends to the maximum point position, it is possible to give the player a great joy and a sense of superiority to be a big hit.

  An LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 87, and by turning on or blinking the LED together with the rotating operation of the first accessory 87, the notice effect is further enhanced. Be emphasized. In addition, an image with increased brightness around the first accessory 87 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87. Thereby, the notice effect by the first accessory 87 is further emphasized, and the pleasure of the player can be further increased.

  Here, the configuration of the first accessory 87 will be described with reference to FIG. The first accessory 87 employs a rack and opinion method as a structure for vertically moving the first accessory 87, and includes a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a driving gear 87b as a gear, and a driven gear. 87c and a slide gear 87d. Although not shown, a first accessory rotating motor 87e (see FIG. 6) for rotating the first accessory 87 is provided. When the first accessory rotating motor 87e is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates clockwise (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2) in the front of the game area when viewed from the front.

  The first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is a stepping motor, and drives and rotates the drive gear 87b in given steps by applying a pulse signal. The driven gear 87c is meshed with the driving gear 87b, and is driven to rotate by the rotational force of the driving gear 87b.

  The first slide gear 87d is formed by cutting a flat bar into gears. The first slide gear 87d is meshed with the driven gear 87c, and can reciprocate up and down with the rotation of the driven gear 87c. . A first accessory 87 is connected to a lower end of the first slide gear 87d.

  Therefore, the drive gear 87a is driven and rotated in step units by the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, so that the slide gear 87d moves vertically in step units via the driven gear 87c. Accordingly, the first accessory 87 can be moved up and down in a range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position, and the first accessory 87 is driven in the direction in which the first accessory 87 descends by 100 steps, the first accessory 87 is moved up and down. Is configured to reach the maximum point position.

  The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e is performed by outputting an audio, and turning on and off the illuminations 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like by an audio lamp described below. This is performed by the control device 112.

  A projection 87f is provided on the upper end of the slide gear 87d. An origin detection sensor 88 is provided at the position of the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. A maximum point detection sensor 89 is provided at the position of the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d when the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position.

  Here, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 88 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 88. Note that the maximum point detection sensor 89 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 88, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The origin detection sensor 88 includes a light emitting element mounting portion 88a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is mounted, a light receiving element mounting portion 88b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is mounted, and one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 88a. A U-shaped sensor formed by one end of a light receiving element mounting portion 88b and a connecting portion 88c for connecting the light emitting device and the light receiving device so as to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. The portion 88a, the light receiving element mounting portion 88b, and the connecting portion 88c form a detection groove 88d.

  If there is no insert in the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching part 88a is received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching part 88b as it is. On the other hand, when the insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 88a is blocked, and the light is received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 95b. Can not. The origin detection sensor 88 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element, and outputs an on signal when light is not received, so that in the control device that has received the signal, any insert is inserted into the detection groove 88d. It can be determined whether or not it has been inserted.

  In the origin detecting sensor 88, the light emitting element mounting portion 88a is disposed on the front side in front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 85b is disposed on the rear side in front view, the connecting portion 88c is disposed on the left side in front view, and the first accessory 87 is at the origin position. The projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is inserted into the detection groove 88d, so that light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the origin detecting sensor 88 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the control device outputs the ON signal from the origin detecting sensor 88, thereby allowing the control device to perform the first role. It can be determined that the object 87 has reached the origin position.

  The maximum point detection sensor 89 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 88, the first accessory 87 is at the maximum point position, and the projection 87f of the slide gear 87d is located inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 89. It is attached so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 89 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the control device outputs the ON signal from the maximum point detection sensor 89, and It can be determined that the one accessory 87 has reached the maximum point position.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opening). ). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passages through the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance (starting winning opening) 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Then, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped, a display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a third symbol according to the lottery result is displayed in the third symbol display. It is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 of the device 81. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped and the LED 37a is turned on. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and temporarily stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 in the ROM 202 and various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a departure variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used for controlling these processes. The RAM 203 controls main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (eg, jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, and the like). Various counters are provided for the operation.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), or at intervals of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 22). Further, some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 22). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at each counter update timing for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The suspension area stores the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Is an area for temporarily storing (holding). The execution area stores a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine a change pattern and a stop type of a jackpot lottery and a change effect at a change start timing. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no hold in the hold area and all of the hold first to fourth areas are empty areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first hold area, the value of each counter is stored in the second hold area. If there are two holds in the hold area and only the values of the respective counters are stored in the hold first and second areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the hold third area. When there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the first to third reservation areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the fourth reservation area.

  Thereby, the values of the respective counters obtained from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning prize are stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of the start winning prize. Can be. If the start winning is detected when the values of the respective counters are stored in all the reserved first to fourth areas, the values of the respective counters at that time are discarded without being reserved. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four start winnings.

  Also, at the start timing of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 transfers the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, a jackpot lottery, a variation pattern of the variation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

  Further, after the values of the respective counters in the first reserved area are moved to the execution area, the values of the respective counters stored in the second reserved area are shifted to the empty first reserved area and stored in the third reserved area. The value of each of the counters is shifted to the vacant second area, and the value of each counter stored in the fourth area is shifted to the vacant third area. Thus, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is opened.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). Updating of the first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reaches a maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). This is done by returning to 0 later. Further, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the result is periodically updated from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is obtained. Is set in the first random number counter C1 as a new initial value, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 also includes a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated not only once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, but also repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64. Then, at the start of the change, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number value (big hit random number value; also referred to as a hit value) which is a big hit. Perform a lottery. The value of the random number to be a jackpot (the jackpot random number value) is set by a jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (more precisely, the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c). ) Is determined to be a big hit if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the big hit random number value set by the big hit random number table 202a.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a indicates a value (a jackpot random number value) of a first random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random value that is referred to when the gaming state is in the low probability state (that is, a period during which the probability is not being changed) and a jackpot random value that is referred to when the gaming state is in the high probability state (that is, when the probability is being changed). The number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the big hit, the probability of the big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 899. In addition, the number of the jackpot random numbers that make a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “low probability state”. . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that become a jackpot in the high probability state is 30, and the value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 are associated with the “high probability state” and are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is stored.

  When performing a jackpot determination, the MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value suitable for the gaming state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, the MPU 201 determines whether the value of the first random number counter C1 (first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area 203c) used for the jackpot determination is the big random number read from the big random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined to be a big hit.

  In other words, when the gaming state is the low probability state, the big hit is obtained when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of “7, 307, 582”. Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the big hit probability in the low probability state is 1/300. When the gaming state is the high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 ". Accordingly, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The jackpot random value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the jackpot random number value, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the jackpot is determined. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of a big hit in the case of a big hit, and is added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), Along with the first random number counter C1, it is stored in any of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of departure. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number with a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the change pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the big hit type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the big hit type table 202b is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a "15R normal jackpot" that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a "2R probability variable jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  In the big hit type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value “40 to 40” of the first hit type counter C2 with respect to the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ", and the value" 80-99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change jackpot.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability change big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "60". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b according to the set probability.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of a stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop type") in the case of a deviation, and is added, for example, one by one in the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3. As the stop type selected in the present embodiment, after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and is stopped. There are three stop (production) patterns: "reach other than front and rear departures" where the stop occurs except before and after the reach symbol, and "complete departure" where no reach occurs.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The ball is stored in any of the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is not a random number with a big hit, that is, if it is a random number to be lost, the type of stop in the variable effect. Is the one when it comes off. In this case, the stop type at the time of departure is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop types are selected are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as 0 to 89 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, It is easy to select "completely off". This table shows that the range of random numbers corresponding to “reach out of front and rear” and “reach other than out of front and back” is narrow, with “reach out of front and back” being 98, 99 and “reach other than out of front and back” being 90 to 97. It is difficult to select “reach out” or “reach other than front and rear departure”.

  In the case of the low probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. It is difficult to select “completely out of order”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and back out” is easy to select. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a loop counter used for determining a variation pattern, and is configured to be added, for example, one by one in a range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every 4 milliseconds in a main process (see FIG. 22) described later, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  At the start of the change, the MPU 201 refers to the value of the change type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b and the change pattern table stored in the ROM 202 to determine the change pattern to be executed in the change effect. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

  That is, the main controller 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern. The specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select a third symbol display device from among the variation modes in which variation display is possible with the variation time. At 81, the details of the variation of the third symbol to be displayed are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. In addition to the output, the lamps of the lamp display device 227 (the illuminated units 29 to 33) are turned on and flashed.

  As described above, the main control device 110 determines only the change time as the process of determining the change pattern, and the details of the change mode according to the change time are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining a fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. In comparison with the case where the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, the determination process of the variation pattern of the main control device 110 can be easily performed.

  Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the like. There is a possibility that the command must be composed of bytes or more, and transmission and reception of the command may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. Therefore, if only the information regarding the determined fluctuation time is notified to the sound lamp controller 113 and the like. Often, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transmission and reception of the command from becoming complicated. Further, even if the main control device 110 determines only the variation time of the symbol variation, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the variation mode according to the designated variation time from among many variation modes. In addition, since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform variable display in the determined variation mode, it is possible to provide a variety of variable effects to the player, and to enhance the interest of the player. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, as a variation pattern table used to determine a variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c used at the time of a jackpot, and a variation pattern table used at the time of a miss. A deviation pattern table 202d for deviation is provided. In addition, as the variation pattern table 202d for departure, the variation pattern for departure (probability) depends on whether the gaming state is the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation, or the normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state. A table 202d2 and a variation pattern table 202d1 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

  Here, the details of the various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot types. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is the 15R probability jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, and a 2R jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is the 2R jackpot. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a big random number at the start of the change, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is changed to the big hit type. Accordingly, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

  Common to the 15R jackpots are variations A having a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B having a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C having a variation time of 90 seconds. The correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is as follows: fluctuation A is 0 to 10, fluctuation B is 11 to 99, and fluctuation C is 100 to 198.

  When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the normal reach mode under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a super-reach mode, or the variation effect is performed by a pseudo-run, under the control of the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. Is When the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a special reach mode under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect by a pseudo-run. Is performed.

  The no-reach is a reach in which the fluctuation time is short, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (a so-called bitter stop and the symbols are aligned). The super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach developed from the long reach or the normal reach). Also, in the special reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the super reach (for example, the special destination that is different from the super reach in the development destination from the reach that develops further after the super reach and the normal reach) High reach).

  Since the table common to the 15R jackpots is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that the normal reach and the super reach are also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  As the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach executed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, many with different effect contents are prepared even with the same fluctuation time. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, a reach in which a predetermined character is displayed when two symbols on the activated line L1 are in the reach state with the same symbol or at another timing is prepared. ing. In addition, various characters are also displayed in this case. Furthermore, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are prepared, such as a reach to quickly change and display the rear image, a reach to add a notice effect before the start of fluctuation, and a reach to add a big hit effect by re-change. ing. Thereby, various fluctuation effects can be executed, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation B or the variation C is determined as the variation pattern, not only the reach but also the variation effect by the pseudo-run can be executed by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , And the pseudo-ream further enhances the interest of the player.

  The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation having a variation time of 59 seconds, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is the 2R-variable jackpot, the 2R variation (59 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  When the 2R variation (59 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, one aspect is selected from a plurality of variation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot prepared by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , A fluctuation effect is performed in the selected mode. As the variation mode exclusively used for the 2R probability change jackpot, for example, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with a “chicken” character, or a “girl” that does not normally appear A variation mode in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character is included.

  Although the change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the change type counter CS1, the change pattern may be determined using other plural change type counters. For example, another variation type counter for fine-tuning the variation time by about ± several seconds may be provided, or a warning effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or a reach effect may be added before the start of the variation or during the variation effect. May be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8D, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is exclusively used for complete detachment, which is referred to when complete detachment is determined as a stop type at the time of detachment, and reach-behind-reach and forward-backward-reach. Is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. Is attached.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area at the start of the fluctuation is not a value of a big hit (big hit random value), that is, a value of a loss, the gaming state excludes the time reduction state. When in the normal low probability state, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is changed according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. , And the deviation pattern (normal).

  For the complete departure only, as fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation D in which fluctuation is completed in a short time of 7 seconds and reach is not established, a fluctuation E which is longer than 10 seconds and a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation D, and a fluctuation E, The time is as long as 55 seconds, and the pseudo fluctuation by the pseudo run is performed five times in one fluctuation, and finally there is a fluctuation F that completely deviates without reaching a reach, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 98, the variation E (10 seconds) is 99 to 148, and the variation F (55 seconds) is 149 to 198. In addition, the reach has the above-described fluctuation A (30 seconds), fluctuation B (60 seconds), and fluctuation C (90 seconds) as fluctuation patterns, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is fluctuation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, variation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and variation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (e), the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete departure is determined as the departure stop type, similarly to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. And a common reach that is referred to when a reach other than the front-rear reach and a reach other than the front-rear departure are determined as the stop type at the time of the detachment.

  Then, for each of the divided groups, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in each group. Note that the variation pattern selected when exclusive departure only is referred to does not include the variation F (55 seconds) but only the variation D (7 seconds) and the variation E (10 seconds). The variation patterns selected when the common reach is referred to include the variation A (30 seconds), the variation B (60 seconds), and the variation C (90 seconds), as in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. ).

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, execution is performed. In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b is determined from the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2. Is done.

  In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is such that the variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 190, and the variation E (10 seconds) is 191 to 198. Has become. Further, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is such that the variation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, the variation B is 99 to 190, and the various special reach is 191 to 198.

  The out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probable change. Become. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the high probability state, if a fluctuation F having a fluctuation time of 55 seconds or a fluctuation E having a relatively long fluctuation time is performed many times despite the complete departure, the following occurs. It may take time until the start of the variable display, giving the player a waiting state, and giving the player an unpleasant feeling. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is also unfavorably reduced. Therefore, in the case of a complete departure, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probable change, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the fluctuation state is larger than when the gaming state is in the normal state excluding the time saving state. By configuring so that the fluctuation D having a fluctuation time shorter than E is easily selected and starting the next fluctuation display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of notice, etc.). In addition, when the reach is established at the time of departure, another variation type counter determines how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to stop last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol deviated before and after deviating, etc.). May be determined by

  Further, the selection of the type of disconnection is configured to be divided into the variable pattern for normal (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the variable pattern for positive (variable) table 202d2. In the case of (for example, three or more in the case of a maximum of four), the fluctuation display may be ended early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, A configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern table for normal or certain variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls is prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the fluctuations D and E are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , The fluctuation D and the fluctuation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the various counters will be described again. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is added one by one in the range of 0 to 250, and reaches the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the update is periodically performed from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done.

  The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores a counter buffer 203b for storing various counters shown in FIG. 7 and a reserved ball storage area 203c, as well as the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 22), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 21). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a. The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a holds a variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The reserve ball number counter 203a has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of reserve balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S1403 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time a variable display based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 17).

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a ball is entered into the first entrance port 64 and the retained ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the reserved ball count counter 203a is incremented by 1 to calculate the value of the variable display reserved ball count itself retained in the main control device 110. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the retained ball counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, deviates from the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227. It controls the driving of the display 87 and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  The audio ramp control device 113 includes an MPU 221 that is an arithmetic device that controls the entire audio ramp control device 113, a sound output LSI 301 that generates a sound to be reproduced, and drives the audio output device 226 to output the generated sound. have. The MPU 221 has a program ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  Here, the details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a retained ball number counter 223a, a detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, a time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c, a start winning counter 223d, a frame button operation effect flag 223e, a frame button operation counter 223f, a pointer 223g, a timer counter 223h, It has at least a tone generation flag 223j and a pitch information memory 223k.

  The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect that are suspended in the control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the value of the pending ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 by adding the number of pending balls of the variable effect by entering the first entrance port 64. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved Stored ball number of the varied effect) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 25).

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and in accordance with the reception, the third symbol When the mode of the variable display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 26). As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or stores the retained ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stored or updated reserved ball number counter 223a at the timing of updating the value of the stored ball number.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, it displays the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count symbol for the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113. Drawing of an image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2951 in FIG. 41). As described above, the value of the pending ball counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the pending counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the pending counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is a counter for determining the fluctuation mode (detailed fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect to be started based on the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, and is a program ROM 222. This is used in combination with the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a (see FIG. 6) provided in. Here, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a will be described along with the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b.

  In the present embodiment, as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from main controller 110, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds. In addition to the normal reach, a plurality of normal reach that are displayed while a predetermined character is changing are prepared.

  As a detailed pattern determined when the variation B (variation time 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the variation time of 60 seconds, or the back image is rapidly changed and displayed. In addition to the plurality of super reach, a plurality of pseudo runs in which the pseudo fluctuation is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds are prepared.

  As a detailed pattern determined when the change C (change time 90 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the change time of 90 seconds, or the back image is rapidly changed and displayed. In addition to the plurality of special reach, a plurality of pseudo runs in which the pseudo fluctuation is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared.

  As a detailed variation pattern determined when the 2R variation (variation time is 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation big hits having a variation time of 59 seconds are prepared.

  Further, for each variation pattern (variation A to variation F, 2R variation), different detailed variation patterns are prepared depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, the time saving, or the probable variation state.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. It is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of a variation effect to be executed for the variation pattern command from a plurality of detailed variation patterns.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is configured by a loop counter, and is updated periodically (in the present embodiment, the processing of S1912 executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 24)). . The updating of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Also, an initial value “0” is set in a RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a contains various detailed patterns prepared for each fluctuation pattern for each fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, and 2R fluctuation) notified from the main controller 110. The value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is determined in association with the variation pattern. In addition, the association between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b depends on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuation effect is performed (either the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state). Furthermore, it is associated with each of the variation patterns (variation A, variation B, variation C, and 2R variation) separately depending on whether the symbol confirmed and displayed in the variation effect is “big hit” or “missing”.

  Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 reads the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state and the variation type notified by the received stop type command is determined to be a jackpot, the gaming state is determined based on the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is "normal state" and the stop type is "big hit", the detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a. . Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state and it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is out of the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the gaming state corresponds to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is in the "time saving state" and the stop type is "out", the detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a. .

  The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 on the basis of the determined detailed variation pattern, and sends the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform a variation effect based on the determined detailed variation pattern.

  When the fluctuation D (variation time: 7 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the detailed fluctuation pattern of the mode in which the fluctuation completely disappears after the fluctuation time of 7 seconds elapses is determined by the pachinko machine 10. One is prepared for each game state. When the fluctuation E (the fluctuation time is 10 seconds) is instructed, the details of the mode in which the fluctuation E is completely deviated after the fluctuation time of 10 seconds elapses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when the fluctuation F (the fluctuation time is 55 seconds) is instructed, the pseudo fluctuation is performed five times by the pseudo run within the fluctuation time of 55 seconds, and the details are such that the reach is not completely established without finally reaching. One variation pattern is prepared. However, the change F is instructed only when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, as described above.

  Therefore, when any of the fluctuations D and E is instructed from main controller 110, MPU 221 prepares correspondingly according to the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 irrespective of the value of detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. The detailed variation pattern determined is determined, and based on the determined variation pattern, the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command. Further, when the fluctuation F is instructed from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 causes the MPU 221 to determine only the prepared detailed fluctuation pattern irrespective of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. It controls the output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and notifies the display control device 114 of a detailed variation pattern by a display variation pattern command.

  Here, in the sound ramp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is based on the stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probable big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R certain big hit, front-rear reach, front-rear reach, Other than reach, complete departure) and the number of fluctuations.

  For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variable production, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot is indicated as the stop type, the pachinko machine 10 of the pachinko machine 10 is changed from the large hit production after the variable production until the next big hit. It is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state. In addition, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variable production, when 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the large hit production after the fluctuation production, until 100 fluctuation productions are performed, or the next big success Until, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the time saving state. After 100 fluctuation effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

  The time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is used as background music (hereinafter, referred to as “BGM (Back Ground Music)”) and used as a background music (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving BGM”) when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state. Is a flag indicating that playback is in progress. When the BGM reproduction flag 223d during time saving is on, it indicates that BGM for time saving is being reproduced as BGM, and when it is off, it indicates that BGM other than BGM for time reduction is being reproduced as BGM.

  The time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value in a RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the reproduction of the BGM for time reduction is started under the control of the MPU 221, the BGM reproduction flag for time reduction B223c is set to ON (S2148 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the reproduction of the BGM for time reduction is stopped by the MPU 221, the BGM reproduction flag for time reduction B223c is set to OFF (S2149 in FIG. 28).

  In the present embodiment, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state, when a ball entry (start winning prize) into the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the player is notified that there is a ball entry. The incoming sound is output from the sound output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the incoming sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the BGM for time reduction.

  Specifically, when the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on and the MPU 221 receives the pending ball number command from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 determines that there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64, and Stock that information. Further, the MPU 221 manages the timing of the beats of the BGM for time reduction sounded from the audio output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM for time saving or at the timing of the middle of the beat (back beat), the incoming sound corresponding to the stored incoming ball is emitted from the audio output device 226.

  Thus, the incoming sound is generated in time with the beat of the BGM for time saving, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM for time reduction, so that the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  In addition, when the ball has entered the first entrance 64 continuously, the MPU 221 stocks not only the timing of the beat of the BGM for time saving but also the timing of the back beat (middle of the beat). The incoming sound corresponding to the incoming ball is emitted from the sound output device 226. Thereby, a more complex rhythm can be carved by the incoming sound, so that the player can be further enjoyed.

  Further, when generating the incoming sound, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the incoming sound based on the code (chord) of the BGM for time saving at the sounding timing. Specifically, one pitch is selected from the pitches of the constituent sounds constituting the chord as the pitch of the incoming ball sound. For example, if the chord of the BGM for time saving at the sounding timing of the incoming sound is “C”, one of the constituent sounds “do”, “mi”, and “so” of the chord is set to the pitch of the incoming sound. Select.

  As a result, the incoming sound is not only generated in time with the beat of the BGM for time reduction, but also generated at a pitch that matches the code of the BGM for time reduction at that time. Therefore, the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the BGM for time reduction, so that the player can hear a more comfortable sound. Further, when the ball continues to enter the first ball entrance 64, the melody accompanied by the BGM for time reduction can be composed of the incoming sound, and the player can hear the melody. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entered balls. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies played by the incoming sound at different times.

  Further, when the MPU 221 generates three consecutive pitching sounds corresponding to the pitching ball stocked in the same code in the time saving BGM, the first pitching sound and the third pitching sound are different from each other. The pitch pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and the second pitching sound is a transitional sound that musically connects the first constituent sound and the third constituent sound. For example, if the code of the BGM for time saving when the incoming sound is pronounced three times in succession is "C", the pitch of the first incoming sound is set to the constituent sound "do" and the third incoming The pitch of the ball sound is referred to as the constituent sound "mi", and the pitch of the second ball entry sound is referred to as the elapsed sound "re". As a result, the three incoming sounds are sequentially pronounced in the order of “do,” “re,” and “mi” while matching the beat of the BGM of the code “C,” so that the width of the melody played by the incoming sound is spread. That is, the pitching sound is generated while inserting the pitching sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound between pitching sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord of the BGM while matching the rhythm of the BGM. Thereby, the melody by the incoming sound accompanied by the BGM for time reduction can be varied. Therefore, the melody due to the incoming sound is not monotonous, and a sound output that does not make the player tired can be performed.

  The starting winning counter 223d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the first entrance opening 64, that is, the number of winning winnings. When the MPU 221 receives the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 when there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the start winning counter 223d, and the first ball entrance. The incoming balls to the ball 64 are stocked (S2010 in FIG. 25).

  Then, when the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on and the time-saving BGM is reproduced as BGM, if the start winning counter 223d is a value of 1 or more at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM, that is, If the incoming ball to the first entrance hole 64 is stocked, at the timing of the beat, an incoming ball sound with a pitch of one of the constituent sounds of the BGM code for time saving at that time is generated (FIG. 29). Thereby, the incoming sound representing the incoming ball to the first incoming port 64 can be sounded in accordance with the beat and the chord of the BGM for time saving, and the player can hear a rhythmical and pleasant sound. Can be.

  Further, when the value of the starting winning counter 223d is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of the time saving BGM, and a pitching sound is generated in the previous beat, the code of the time saving BGM at the timing of the back beat is used. On the condition that the code of the BGM for time saving at the timing of the next beat is the same as the code of the BGM for the next beat, a pitching sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code is generated (see FIG. 30). Accordingly, when the ball continues to enter the first entrance 64, the pitching sound is generated using the timing of the back beat of the BGM for time saving, so that a complicated rhythm due to the pitching sound can be carved. it can. In addition, at the timing of the preceding and following beats, the incoming sound is pronounced with the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord, whereas the incoming sound emitted at the timing of the back beat has the elapsed sound of the chord as the pitch Therefore, as described above, the melody based on the incoming sound can have a variation.

  The start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 when a pitching sound is generated (S2167 in FIG. 29, S2179 in FIG. 30). Further, the start winning counter 223d is initialized to 0 when the reproduction of the BGM for time saving as BGM is started (S2148 in FIG. 28). Therefore, the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 during the playback of the BGM for time saving can be stocked using the start winning counter 223d.

  In addition, when the value of the start winning prize counter 223d becomes 3, even if there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64 (even if a pending ball number command is received), the ball does not count the ball. (S2009 in FIG. 25). In other words, the number of balls that enter the first ball entrance 64 is not more than three.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, since the incoming sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the BGM for time reduction, when many incoming balls into the first entrance 64 are stocked, the incoming sound is finally stocked. The sound of the incoming sound for the incoming ball is pronounced with a large delay from the actual incoming ball, and the difference between the actual incoming ball and the sounding timing of the incoming ball sound becomes remarkable, causing the player to feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk of being embraced. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the difference between the actual ball entry and the sounding timing of the ball entry sound is suppressed by setting the stock of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 to three or less. it can.

  If the tempo (number of beats per minute) of the BGM for time reduction is, for example, 160 BPM (beats per mute), the firing of the ball is set to less than 100 balls per minute. Therefore, it can be said that there is almost no case where more than three balls are stocked in the first winning port 64. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 is restricted so as not to stock more than three, the entrance to the first entrance 64 where no incoming sound is pronounced can actually occur. In addition, the player does not feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is not pronounced.

  The upper limit of the number of stocks may be changed according to the tempo of the BGM for time reduction, assuming that the number of balls fired within a predetermined time is constant. For example, when the tempo of the BGM for time reduction is 100 BPM, the number of beats per minute is smaller than when the tempo is 160 BPM. Therefore, the number of incoming balls to be stocked may be set to, for example, four. Thereby, the incoming sound can be made to sound for more incoming balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of stocks is determined for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the incoming sound is emitted. However, even if the upper limit of the number of stocks is not provided, a configuration may be adopted. Good. In this case, as described above, when many incoming balls into the first entrance 64 are stocked, the sound of the incoming sound for the last stocked ball is greatly delayed from the actual incoming ball. As a result, the melody played by the delayed pitching sound allows the player to immerse himself in the lingering sensation.

  The frame button operation effect flag 223e is a flag indicating that an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is, for example, a possibility that a player hits the frame button 22 continuously and a predetermined character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effect may be a big hit. When the effect suggests or the normal reach reaches the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal reach, and the player selects the effect mode of the super reach. It includes directing.

  The frame button operation flag 223e indicates that an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the ON state, and an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed in the OFF state. Indicates no.

  The frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is started during the variable effect, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON (S2139 in FIG. 28). When the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 ends, the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to off (S2141 in FIG. 29).

  In the present embodiment, when an operation requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, and when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, an operation of notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated is performed. The sound is output from the audio output device 226. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to output the operation sound in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of BGM.

  Specifically, when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on, the MPU 221 executes a frame button operation sound output process (S2137 in FIG. 27), and receives a signal indicating that an operation has been performed from the frame button 22. Then, stock that information first. Further, the MPU 221 manages the timing of the beat of the BGM generated by the audio output device 226. Then, at the timing of the beat of the BGM or the timing of the middle of the beats (back beat), the operation sound corresponding to the stocked operation is emitted from the audio output device 226.

  As a result, the operation sound is generated in synchronism with the beat of the BGM, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game while rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of the BGM, thereby increasing the player's feelings for the game. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, when the player continuously operates the frame button 22, the MPU 221 outputs the operation sound corresponding to the stored operation not only at the timing of the BGM beat but also at the timing of the back beat from the audio output device 226. Pronounce. Thereby, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the operation sound, so that the player can further enjoy the operation of the frame button 22.

  Also, when the operation sound is generated in the same manner as the sound of the incoming ball sound when the BGM for time reduction is reproduced, the MPU 221 determines the pitch of the operation sound based on the BGM code (chord) at the sound generation timing. I do. Thus, the chord is formed while adjusting the rhythm with the operation sound and the BGM, so that the player can hear a more comfortable sound. Further, when the player continues to operate the frame button 22, a melody accompanied by BGM is constituted by the operation sound, and the player can hear the melody. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the operation timing and the number of operations. Therefore, in order to listen to various melodies played by the operation sound from time to time, the player has a desire to operate the frame button 22 in various rhythms. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more enjoyment of the game.

  Further, the MPU 221 performs the first operation when the operation sound corresponding to the operation stocked in the same code in the BGM is generated three consecutive times, similarly to the generation of the incoming sound at the time of playing the BGM for time saving. For the sound and the third operation sound, a pitch is selected from the constituent sounds, and for the second operation sound, a passing sound that musically connects the first and third constituent sounds is selected.

  Thereby, the operation sound is emitted while the operation sound having the pitch of the elapsed sound is inserted between the operation sounds having the pitch of the component sound of the BGM chord while being adjusted to the rhythm of the BGM. Variations can be given to the melody by the operation sound accompanied by BGM. Therefore, the melody due to the operation sound does not become monotonous, and it is possible to perform a sound output that does not tire the player.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is not performed while the BGM for time saving is being reproduced. That is, the operation sound indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is not emitted during the period in which the incoming sound indicating the entry into the first entrance opening 64 is emitted.

  The frame button operation number counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated by the player. When a signal indicating that the operation has been performed from the frame button 22 is input, the MPU 221 transmits the signal to the frame button operation counter 223f in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1907 in FIG. 24) executed in the main processing. 1 is added, and the operation on the frame button 22 is stocked.

  When the frame button operation effect flag 223e is ON and the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the frame button operation ON output is performed. The process is executed (S2137 in FIG. 27), and if the value of the frame button operation counter 223f is 1 or more at the timing of the BGM beat, that is, if the operation on the frame button 22 is stocked, At the timing, a process of generating an operation sound with one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at the pitch is performed. As a result, the operation sound representing the operation on the frame button 22 can be generated in synchronism with the beat and the chord of the BGM, and the player can hear a rhythmical and pleasant sound.

  When the value of the frame button operation number counter 223f is 2 or more at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the operation sound is generated at the previous beat, the code of the BGM at the timing of the back beat and the next On condition that the BGM chord at the beat timing is the same chord, a process of generating an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of that chord is performed. Thereby, when the operation on the frame button 22 is continued, the operation sound is generated using the timing of the back beat of the BGM, so that a complicated rhythm by the operation sound can be carved. In addition, at the timing of the preceding and following beats, the operation sound is emitted with the pitch of the component sound of the chord, whereas the operation sound emitted at the timing of the back beat is the pitch of the elapsed sound of the chord, As described above, the melody by the operation sound can have a variation.

  The frame button operation counter 223f is decremented by 1 when an operation sound is generated. Also, the frame button operation number counter 223f is initialized to 0 when the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on (S2139 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the effect requiring the operation of the frame button is being performed, the operation can be stocked by the frame button operation number counter 223f.

  When the value of the frame button operation counter 223f is 3, even if there is an operation on the frame button 22, the operation is not counted. That is, the operation to the frame button 22 is not stocked for more than three operations.

  In the pachinko machine 10, since the operation sound is generated in synchronism with the beat (or back beat) of the BGM, when many operations on the frame buttons 22 are stocked, the operation sound for the operation that was last stocked is generated. This is because the operation is performed with a large delay from the actual operation, and the difference between the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound becomes remarkable, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, by setting the stock of the operation on the frame button 22 to three or less, it is possible to suppress a noticeable difference between the actual operation and the sounding timing of the operation sound.

  An operation detection invalid period may be provided for the operation of the frame button 22. That is, when the operation of the frame button 22 is detected, even if the frame button 22 is operated for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), the operation may be invalidated. As a result, even though the frame button 22 is operated once, it is detected that the frame button 22 has been operated based on vibration or the like caused by the operation, and the operation is recognized as an operation different from the operation intended by the player. Can be suppressed. When the operation detection invalid period is provided, for example, when the operation detection invalid period of 0.2 seconds is provided, even if the frame button 22 is repeatedly struck, the operation of the frame button 22 is performed for at least 0.2 seconds. Is invalidated, so that if the BGM tempo is 160 BPM (the period of one beat is 375 milliseconds), the number of operations of the frame button 22 stocked during one beat is at most two. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to set an upper limit of the stock for the number of times the frame button 22 is operated.

  Further, the operation detection invalid period may be set according to the tempo of the BGM. For example, if the BGM tempo is 120 BPM (the cycle of one beat is 500 milliseconds), the operation detection invalid period is set to 0.25 seconds, and the tempo of the BGM is 150 BPM (the cycle of one beat is 400 milliseconds). ), The operation detection invalidation period may be set to 0.2 seconds. As a result, the number of operations of the frame button 22 that is stocked during one beat is at most two. Therefore, even if the upper limit of the stock is not provided, the operation sound is generated using the BGM beat and back beat timing. Accordingly, when the frame button 22 is operated, the operation sound can be generated without delay.

  The pointer 223g is for designating an address at which various types of control information to be obtained at a certain time are specified from a data table in which various types of control information to be executed in the audio lamp control device 113 are specified in chronological order. A data table is prepared for each effect whose execution is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, and data tables corresponding to all the effects are stored in a data table storage area 222b (see FIG. 6) provided in the program ROM 222. Is done.

  When the MPU 221 determines an effect to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command received from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads a data table corresponding to the determined effect from the data table storage area 222b. In accordance with the read data table, the MPU 221 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226, lights / blinks the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation). Of the motor 87e).

  In each address of the data table, control information to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 at the time indicated by the address is specified in order from the address “0001H”. That is, when the reproduction of the predetermined sound is started or stopped at the first time, information for instructing the start or stop of the predetermined sound is defined in association with the address corresponding to the first time. . When the predetermined lamp is turned on in the second time, information for instructing lighting of the predetermined lamp is defined in association with the address corresponding to the second time. In the third time, when the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a is driven to lower the first accessory 87 by a predetermined step, the first accessory 87 is associated with the address corresponding to the third time, and Information for driving the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a so as to lower the accessory 87 by a predetermined step is defined.

  When the effect to be executed is determined by the MPU 221 and the use of the data table corresponding to the effect is determined by the MPU 221, the pointer 223g is once initialized to 0 (S2147 in FIG. 27). Then, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the pointer 223g before reading the control information from the data table, and reads the control information corresponding to the address indicated by the pointer 223g after the addition in the data table. Then, in accordance with the content specified by the control information, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory Control of the rotation motor 87e).

  Here, when the MPU 221 determines an effect to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and newly reads a data table corresponding to the effect, the MPU 221 starts the reading at the timing of the BGM beat ( S2123 in FIG. 27). Also, when reading out the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table by counting up the pointer 223g (adding 1), the same is performed at the timing of the BGM beat. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 starts or stops the sound output from the sound output device 226, turns on / off the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the second accessory motor 87a). The start of the single accessory rotation motor 87e) can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, since the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be increased.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 10, an operation timing of the first accessory 87 in the case of making a one-time notification by the first accessory 87 will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the first accessory 87. As shown in FIG. 10, when one notification is made by the first accessory 87, the first accessory 87 stored inside the upper part of the center frame 86 descends by 80 steps in accordance with the BGM beat. Start. Then, when the lowering of the first accessory 87 is stopped in accordance with the beat of the BGM, the vertical movement of the first accessory 87 is performed a plurality of times with a width of 20 steps. At this time, the stopping / starting of the ascent / descent of the first accessory 87 is also performed according to the BGM beat. Then, the first accessory 87 is finally lowered to the maximum point position in accordance with the BGM beat, and the rotation of the first accessory 87 is started at the maximum point position also in accordance with the BGM beat.

  In this way, the MPU 221 determines the effect to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113, and then, when newly reading a data table corresponding to the effect, starts the reading at the timing of the BGM beat, Since the reading of the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table is also performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM, for example, as shown in FIG. It can be operated according to the beat. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game rhythmically.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect execution timing of the variable effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an effect execution timing when a detailed fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-run as an example of a fluctuation effect.

  The start of the fluctuating effect is based on the timing at which the ball enters the first entrance 64 when the entry to the first entrance 64 is not suspended, and based on the timing at which the ball enters the first entrance 64. When the entry is suspended, it is determined based on the end timing of the variable effect or the big hit effect that has been performed immediately before, and cannot be matched with the timing of the BGM beat.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down is performed on the third symbol display device 81 from the original start timing of the fluctuation to the timing of the BGM beat (symbol swing period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original variation start timing, reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation effect is started at that timing, and Then, the third symbol display device 81 starts the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol.

  The display patterns of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 are set in advance so as to be performed in accordance with the BGM beat. Further, the output from the sound output device 226 of the sound in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are defined in the data table. It is performed according to the beat. For example, in the fluctuating effect by the pseudo-run shown in FIG. 11, the fluctuating effect is pseudo-stopped, and the output of the chance-up image indicating that the re-fluctuation is performed again is performed according to the beat of the BGM. At the same time, the sound output corresponding to the chance-up image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp are also performed in synchronization with the BGM beat.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat shortly before the original fixed display is performed, and it is also confirmed that the stopped symbol is displayed. The sound output device 226 produces a stop sound to be represented. Thereafter, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down (a symbol shaking period) until the original finalized display timing is reached, and the third symbol is finally displayed at the original finalized display timing.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started irrespective of the beat of the BGM and is definitely displayed, but in the present embodiment, the high-speed fluctuation is started according to the timing of the beat, and once, Perform stop display. A display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down as a symbol swinging period from the initial variation start timing to the start of the high-speed variation and from the temporary stop display to the original final display timing. Do. Thus, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if a stop display was performed. Also, various effect images displayed during the fluctuation effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and further, the output of the sound in accordance with the fluctuation effect and the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227 can be performed by the BGM. Can be performed in time with the beat. Therefore, the player can give a sense that the fluctuating effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a rhythmical game can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of BGM beats. The MPU 221 uses the timer counter 223h to determine the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM being reproduced. The timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 when the BGM reproduced from the audio output device 113 is changed and the reproduction of the changed BGM is started (S2146 in S28). At this time, the MPU 221 reads the tempo (number of beats per minute) of the BGM to be reproduced from the ROM 222, and calculates a beat cycle T (millisecond) therefrom. The beat cycle T (milliseconds) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds / (BGM tempo).

  The tempo of the BGM is specified in the ROM 222 in advance for all the BGMs reproduced by the audio ramp control device 113. Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined so that the period T of the beat is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. Thus, as will be described later, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined only by performing the process of adding 1 to the timer counter 223h every millisecond.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the tempo of all the BGMs reproduced by the audio ramp control device 113 is specified in the ROM 222 in advance. May be defined in the ROM 222 in advance. In this case, the cycle T of the beat of each BGM defined in the ROM 222 may be determined to be a multiple of 2 milliseconds.

  Thereafter, the timer counter 223h is incremented by one in the sound editing / output processing executed every millisecond. However, when the value of the timer counter 223h matches the beat period T, “1” is set instead of adding “1”. Thereby, the cycle of the BGM beat is counted by the timer counter 223h.

  When the value of the timer counter 223h is T, the MPU 221 reads the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the set data table as the timing of the BGM beat, and reads the control information from the audio output device 226. , The lighting and blinking of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 (the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e). Thereby, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM.

  In addition, when the time saving BGM is reproduced as BGM, if the first ball entrance 64 has a winning, the winning is dealt with at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T / 2. Control to generate a winning sound. When an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, when the operation of the frame button 22 is performed, the operation is performed at the timing when the value of the timer counter 223h becomes T or T / 2. Control to generate the corresponding operation sound. Therefore, the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM, so that the player can hear the incoming sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

  The elapsed sound generation flag 223j is a flag indicating that a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is set to the elapsed sound of the chord at the back beat of the BGM is generated. When the sound is off, it indicates that no incoming sound or operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound has been sounded.

  The elapsed sound generation flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value in a RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on.

  When the timing of the back beat is reached, the MPU 221 outputs the incoming sound or the operation sound at the immediately preceding beat, and determines whether the number of incoming balls or the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated into the stocked first entrance port 64. If the number is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not the BGM code in the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM code in the immediately following beat. The chord progression is stored in advance in the program ROM 222 for all the BGMs, and the MPU 221 can grasp the chords of the BGM beats in accordance with the progress of the BGM reproduction.

  Then, in this case, when it is determined that the BGM code in the immediately preceding beat matches the BGM code in the immediately following beat, the MPU 221 sets the elapsed sound of the chord to the pitch at the timing of the back beat. A ball sound or an operation sound is generated, and the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is set to ON. Here, when the pitching sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is pronounced on the back beat, as described above, at least two or more pitching numbers or the number of times of operation are stocked, so that even in the immediately succeeding beat, In this case, a sound for entering the ball or an operation sound is always generated.

  When generating the incoming sound or the operation sound in the immediately following beat, the MPU 221 refers to the elapsed sound generation flag 223j. If the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is on, a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is generated at the timing of the back beat. A pitching sound or an operation sound having a pitch corresponding to the constituent sound corresponding to the sound is generated. In this way, when a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound is generated in the immediately following beat following the elapsed sound of the back beat, the pitch deviating from the elapsed sound generated in the back beat is generated. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in the case where the incoming sound or the operation sound is emitted while inserting the elapsed sound, it is possible to suppress a strange melody.

  The pitch information memory 223k is a memory for storing, when a pitching sound or an operation sound is generated at the timing of a BGM beat, the generated pitch. When determining the sound of the incoming sound or the operation sound at the timing of the BGM beat, the MPU 221 stores the pitch in the pitch information memory 223k (S2166 in FIG. 29).

  Here, after the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is set to the constituent sound of the chord is generated at a beat of a certain BGM, the incoming sound whose pitch is set to the elapsed sound of the same chord at the timing of the subsequent back beat of the BGM. Alternatively, when the operation sound is generated and the incoming sound or the operation sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the same chord is generated at the timing of the next BGM beat, the pachinko machine 10 uses The pitch of the sound and the constituent sound of the next beat are determined based on the pitch of the constituent sound of the first beat. The correspondence between the pitch of the constituent sound on the first beat, the elapsed sound on the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound on the next beat is determined by the program provided in the program 222 for each chord that can be taken by the BGM. The pitch is set by the pitch setting table 222c for sound reproduction (see FIG. 6).

  For example, in the elapsed sound reproduction pitch setting table 222c, the code “C” is associated with the constituent sound “do” in the first beat, and “e” is used as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and the next beat Is defined as "Mi" as the constituent sound in the first beat, and "Fa" as the elapsed sound in the back beat and "So" as the constituent sound in the next beat in association with the constituent sound "Mi" in the first beat. In association with the component sound “S” at the first beat, “F” is defined as the elapsed sound at the back beat, and “Mi” is defined as the component sound at the next beat. For the chord "D", in association with the constituent sound "Le" in the first beat, "Mi" is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and "Fah" is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat, Corresponding to the constituent sound of the first beat "Fa", "E" is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat, "La" is specified as the constituent sound in the next beat, and the constituent sound in the first beat " In association with “La”, “E” is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and “F” is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat. Also, for the code "F", "so" is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat and "la" is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat in association with the constituent sound "fa" in the first beat. , In correspondence with the constituent sound of the first beat, “La”, the stipulated “Si” as the elapsed sound in the back beat and “Do” as the constituent sound in the next beat, the constituent sound in the first beat, In association with “C”, “S” is defined as the elapsed sound in the back beat, and “La” is defined as the constituent sound in the next beat.

  For example, if the chord at a beat of a certain BGM is “C” and a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is the constituent sound “mi” is generated at that time, the MPU 221 outputs the pitch “mi”. Is stored in the pitch information memory 223k. When the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code “C” is to be generated at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the incoming sound or the operation sound that was generated on the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k. Is read out (“Mi” in this example), and for the code “C”, the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound “Mi” is specified from the elapsed sound playback pitch setting table 222c. In this example, “fa” is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and a pitching sound or an operation sound with the elapsed sound “fa” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the back beat.

  Further, at the timing of the next BGM beat following the back beat, a pitching sound or an operation sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the code "C" is also generated (that is, when the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is on). Case), the pitch of the incoming sound or operation sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (in this example, "mi"), and the code "C" corresponds to the constituent sound "mi". The pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during reproduction of the elapsed sound. In this example, “so” is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat, and at the timing of the next beat, the incoming sound or the operation sound with the constituent sound “so” as the pitch is generated.

  Thus, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so" in accordance with the BGM code "C". You. Therefore, when the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is generated on the back beat between the beats at which the incoming sound or the operation sound that pitches the constituent sound of the chord is emitted. In addition, it is possible to suppress the generation of a strange pitch-elapsed sound or the generation of a pitch that deviates from the elapsed sound generated in the back beat in a beat after the back beat. Therefore, when the incoming sound or the operation sound is emitted while inserting the elapsed sound, a beautiful melody can be played.

  The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and indicates whether or not to start a variable display. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 25), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 26).

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main controller 110, a display controller 114, an audio output device 226, a first accessory vertical movement motor 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87b, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like. Each is connected.

  The sound output LSI 301 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that is directly connected to the MPU 221, generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 221, and outputs the sound generated from the sound output device 226. A sound data ROM 306 is connected to the sound output LSI 301. The audio data ROM 306 is a memory in which various audio data are stored.

  When a reproduction start command is set by the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 specifies the sound to start reproduction included in the reproduction start command, reads out the sound data corresponding to the specified sound from the sound data ROM 306, and reproduces the sound. A sound to be generated is generated, and the generated sound is output from the audio output device 226. Further, when a reproduction end command is set by the MPU 221, the MPU 221 specifies a sound to be ended, which is included in the reproduction end command, and ends reproduction of the specified sound.

  The sound output LSI 301 has 16 reproduction channels, and can generate up to 16 sounds at the same time, synthesize (mix) them, and then output them from the sound output device 226.

  The data format stored in the audio data ROM 306 may be any format. For example, it may be a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code variation method, or data compressed by various sound compression methods such as MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). It may be.

  Alternatively, a MIDI file conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for generating various sounds may be stored in the sound data ROM 306. In this case, the sound output LSI 301 includes a MIDI sound source, reads a MIDI file for reproducing a sound of the type instructed to start reproduction from the MPU 221 from the audio data ROM 306, and causes the MIDI sound source to sound according to the read MIDI file. Then, the reproduction of the sound is executed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has at least an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. are doing.

  The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio lamp control device. 113.

  The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a video RAM 236 and an output port 239 via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different jackpot lottery probability and a different number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 controls display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on a command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time in an effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and reads a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a. Then, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the read display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113, and includes, for example, a variable effect, a demo effect, A display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  Note that the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped, A third symbol consisting of a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is finally displayed by receiving a final command (display final command) from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 after the variable effect. This is the effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is a departure symbol, an effect that emphasizes the departure is performed, and when the stop symbol is any one of a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot, each of the jackpots is emphasized. Direction is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the confirmed display effect.

  In the restart effect, the predetermined position is set between the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the time when the final command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. This is an effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) at the center on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and then the third symbol vibrates and is displayed, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect. The display data table for fluctuation which is the display data table for the fluctuation effect is prepared one by one according to the combination of the fluctuation effect pattern to be set and the stop symbol. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect, there are two types: a fixed pattern, a fixed pattern (15R positive variable jackpot or a 2R variable variable jackpot), and a normal variable jackpot (15R regular large jackpot). ) Are prepared.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the display data table for fluctuation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. Rendering information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is defined in the display data table for fluctuation. This back type is any one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sea stage”, and the “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Is displayed, or information for specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the state of the state corresponding to the back type are defined. Display state information indicating whether a back image should be displayed may be defined. The rear image is displayed with the display range, the brightness, the color tone, and the like changed over time. The display state information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the back image in the initial state is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the initial back image indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying an image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). You may. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing an image of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table). Based on the state of the rear image displayed at the stage and the time elapsed since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) was started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating an elapsed time from when the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or an image based on the display data table) according to the back type. The information may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display on the third symbol display device 81), or may include the type information of the display state information (along with the back type and the display state information). For example, the information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or an image may be drawn based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). ) May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is assigned a unique identification number for identifying each of the symbols. For example, the main symbol “0” is assigned an identification number “0”, the main symbol “1” is assigned an identification number “1”, and the main symbol “2” is an identification number “1”. 2 "is attached.

  Further, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until the predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed, because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variable effect can be started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the predetermined time at which the third symbol is switched from the offset information from the stop symbol of the preceding variable effect to the identification number of the third symbol to be actually displayed, The time is set so that it is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The selected display data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a described later provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 changes the program to be executed by the MPU 231 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 and the like. Instead, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a.

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the pachinko machine 10 can create the effect is to determine the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the fly based on the operation of the user, and therefore, the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The additional data table storage area 232b is an area for storing an additional data table that defines display contents of effects to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. is there. An additional data table is prepared and stored in the additional data table storage area 232b for each effect that is additionally displayed.

  Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image which is not normally displayed in one effect is changed. The concept of displaying, superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect Including.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 and displaying the additional effect. Or the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all in one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one production It is.

  The details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame of an image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image of one frame, the type of the sprite is defined, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, Drawing information, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  In the example of FIG. 14, in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, a sprite type (character type: first role) for one character (character 1: corresponding to an image of a movable character) ), A display position, an enlargement factor, a rotation angle, a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, when there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (address “0001H” in FIG. 14 corresponds).

  The display contents defined by the additional data table include, for example, a variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 110. The display contents for displaying the notice effect image, which is additionally displayed, are defined by the additional data table.

  As in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (“00FDH” in the example of FIG. 14). “)” Describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the additional data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 receives the command from the sound lamp control device 113, and if it is determined that the effect is to be displayed in addition to the effect whose display has been started by the received command, the MPU 231 responds to the added effect. The additional data table thus read is read from the additional data table storage area 232b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later.

  Then, every time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is read from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Then, the image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233g becomes "0097H", the MPU 231 specifies the address "0097H" of the additional data table in various sprites specified in the address "0097H" of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of the character 1, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, since null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ 0001H "is generated based on various sprites.

  Also, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233c indicates the address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is issued. With this, the drawing content specified in the display data table is specified in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table is added. The specified image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. In the case where another effect image (for example, an image imitating the first character) is displayed in addition to the effect image (for example, the fluctuation effect image), the addition corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed. By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thus, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and two types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a provisional display of an image in which another effect image is superimposed on each original effect image is provided. If a data table is separately prepared, 32 × (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, a data table corresponding to another effect image, such as the pachinko machine 10, is used as an additional data table. By separately defining, 32 + 2 = 34 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, a data table corresponding to various types of effect modes can be stored in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and further diversification of effect images can be easily achieved.

  Also, as in the present pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even when the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b are used. From the table, while updating the pointer 233c every time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and to easily form one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are displayed. By defining the display content with the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform various effects display from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a time counter 233e.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. And stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233a.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, sets the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 15) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The additional data table buffer 233b causes the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a to additionally display the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect. The MPU 231 writes Null data, which means that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b, at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Clear the contents.

  After that, based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a to display in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not there is an effect to be additionally displayed, and an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c by one, and stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described below is described for each frame, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. When the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, since the null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed as it is.

  The pointer 233c is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing content should be obtained from the display data table and the additional data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233c to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, in the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the pointer is set. An update process is performed (see S2905, FIG. 42) and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by one (see S2981, FIG. 42).

  Each time the pointer 233c is updated, the MPU 231 determines the address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing contents specified in the above are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. . Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233d stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, an address at which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored is described. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address in the storage area 234a. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Performed processing, performed synthesis processing with other sprites according to α blending information, performed color tone correction processing according to color information, and performed filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information Above, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed on the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. (E.g., a reserved image for displaying a reserved ball count design, a warning image for notifying of an error, etc.), and detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame. ) Is generated and the drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 performs the display data table and the additional data on the other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The time counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. )), The time counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (see S2603, FIG. 39) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in the form of compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing one frame of image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates one frame of image data according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and writes the one frame of image data written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 235a in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written to one of the frame buffer areas of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

  The writing of one frame of image data into one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the reading of the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is performed. The image data for the next one frame is written to the frame buffer area of the next frame.

  As described above, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data between the one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a startup process and The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When they reach 899, 99, 99, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the No. 64 (S1105). The details of the fluctuation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the fluctuation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This fluctuation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 16), and controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring (S1201). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1203, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of retained balls of the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is determined to be greater than or equal to 0 (S1204), and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number) N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203c to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as: → the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area. After the data shift processing, a fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state where the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, Then, it is determined whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), the process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S1208: Yes), This processing ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 22) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect according to the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the fluctuation display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop, a demonstration command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (decided according to the change pattern command), and the change time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the processing of S1206, it is determined whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. Depending on the value of the counter C2, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 15 rounds of high probability) after a jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (the maximum probability is 2 rounds and the high probability state after 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a symbol that becomes a probability change jackpot that shifts to a state or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hit occurs, and the red LED and the blue LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. In step S1213, a determination command is set to determine the image. When receiving the confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the elapse of the fluctuation time, and the stopped symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, the change start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S1207). This change start process (S1207) is executed in the change process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , A "big hit" or a "missing" lottery (whether or not) is determined, and the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a lottery (win / fail judgment) process of determining whether or not a big hit has been performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, “7,307,582” associated with “low-probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random value, and If the ten gaming states are in the high-probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298," which are associated with the "high-probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random numbers. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random numbers, and if they match, it is determined that a big hit has occurred. Determine.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1301: Yes), the big hit at the time of the big hit based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the maximum round number is 15R certain variable jackpot which shifts to the high probability state after 15 round jackpots, or the maximum round number is 2 The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of the round or the 15R normal jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds ( The lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In addition, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot types (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot) are stopped in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) at the time of the big hit is determined (S1303). This variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the hit is not a big hit (S1301: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or completely out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. I have.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S1305). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (high-probability state, mid-hours, or low-probability state excluding mid-hours), the stop type set in the process of S1302, and the fluctuation type counter CS1. And the deviation pattern table 202d for deviation. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1303 or S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 22). You.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and if there is a start win, it is determined. , And hold processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S1401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number N of variable effects retained in the main control device 110) is determined. It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, is there no prize in the first entrance 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S1402: No). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and if the number N of reserved balls is less than 4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of reserved balls) is changed. The value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 are added to the free reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area (S1404).

  Next, a reserved ball number command including the reserved ball number N updated by the processing of S1403 is created (S1405), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1406), the start winning processing is ended, and the timer setting is completed. Return to the loading process. This command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 22). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the reserved ball number N included in the reserved ball number command.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 311, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not, it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S1611 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S1611 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1612, S1613).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply cutoff is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16), the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S1101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Send a prize ball command. Further, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). Then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65 (large open). A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the opening 65a is executed (S1704). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “（” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing the ball, and the second symbol display device 83 The variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes from S1701 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1706, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 20 has been executed, the processing at S1710 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 23, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing in S1918 is performed (see FIG. 24) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 24), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1918. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1918 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1802: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S1918 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1804. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1918 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the flow shifts to S1808.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1918, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and the process shifts to S1804 to start the initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the processing of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1918 (see S1917 in FIG. 24). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1918 is executed, the process of S1808 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1918 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1808 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1808 to step S1806 is executed. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process skips S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1810), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1811), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1809 is skipped is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is performed via the process of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1804. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the last execution of the process of S1901 (S1901). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1902. The processing shifts to S1913 without performing the processing of S1911.

  In the process of S1901, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed since S1902 to S1912 are processes related to display, sound, and setting of the operation of the first accessory 87 (that is, setting of the effect). This is because it is not necessary to perform editing within 1 msec), but it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1913 and the command determination processing in S1914 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1914 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1913 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  When the process of S1901 is performed for the first time after the execution of the main process after the start-up process, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1902 without determining whether 1 millisecond or more has elapsed. Alternatively, if the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the execution of the main process after the start-up process, it may be determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901, and the process may proceed to S1902.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1904). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1907 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed.

  Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1907 is omitted.

  Further, when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the variable effect, the process of counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated using the frame button operation number counter 223f is also performed by the frame button input monitoring.・ It is performed in the production process. Thus, the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated is stocked by the frame button operation count 223f. The operation of the stocked frame button 22 is used to output an operation sound indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated, in synchronization with the BGM beat.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1907) is completed, a sound editing / output process is executed (S1908). In the sound editing / output processing, the sound is output in accordance with the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and according to the state of entering the first entrance 64 and the operation state of the frame button 22. The sound output from the output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and a process of outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226 is executed. Details of the sound editing / output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

  Next, a lamp editing process is performed (S1909). In the ramp editing process, a third symbol is displayed in accordance with a data table corresponding to an effect set by a command from the main control device 110, and in accordance with the state of entering the first entrance 64 and the state of operation of the frame button 22. The lighting patterns of the illuminations 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the display device 81.

  Next, a first character editing drive process is executed (S1910). In the first accessory editing driving process, the first accessory vertical motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are drive-controlled in accordance with a data table corresponding to an effect set by a command from the main controller 110, By operating the first accessory 87, a notice effect by the first accessory 87 is executed.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and thereafter, a counter update process is performed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Further, the sound editing / output processing in S1908 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the update of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is performed during this counter update processing. The updating of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

  In the processing of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process of temporarily storing the data for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the fluctuation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1914). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1914 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing in S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off processing is executed (S1918). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1919), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1916: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Further, the sound output from the sound output device 226 does not change, and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the command determination processing (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S1914). This command determination processing (S1914) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, this process also determines the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 when receiving the pending ball number command from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type (any of variation A to F or 2R variation) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. .

  The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in a variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command, and a variation effect is produced on the third symbol display device 81 according to the notified detailed variation pattern. Done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the change start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. It is stored in the RAM 223 (S2005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number command is retained in the main control device 110). The number of retained balls of the variable effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio ramp control device 113 (S2007).

  Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning), every time there is a starting winning, the processing of S2008 is performed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of starting winning detection, the audio lamp control device 113 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  After the processing in S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a updated in the processing in S2007 is set (S2008). As a result, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the start winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009). If the starting winning counter 223d is not 3 (S2009: No), 1 is added to the start winning counter 223d (S2010), and the process returns to the main processing. . If the start winning counter 223d is 3 (S2009: Yes), the process of S2010 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

  By the process of S2010, 1 is added to the start winning counter 223d in accordance with the reception of the number of reserved balls command. Since the pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the start winning counter 223d determines that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. (Start winning prize) is counted. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 stocks the incoming ball into the first incoming hole 64 by the start winning counter 223d.

  When the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is turned on and the time-saving BGM is reproduced as the BGM, the ball that enters the stocked first ball entrance 64 at the timing of the beat of the time-saving BGM. It is used to generate a pitching sound with a pitch being one of the constituent sounds of the BGM for time saving at that time. Thereby, the incoming ball representing the incoming ball to the first entrance 64 is pronounced in accordance with the beat and code of the BGM for time saving, so that the player can hear a rhythmical and pleasant voice. .

  In addition, if the number of balls entering the first entrance port 64 stocked in the start winning counter 223d becomes 3 according to the determination in S2009, the entry into the first entrance port 64 is started by the start winning counter 223d. Even if a ball is not stocked and there is a ball in the first ball entrance 64, the ball is invalidated in terms of counting by the start winning counter 223d.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, since the incoming sound is pronounced in accordance with the beat (or back beat) of the BGM for time reduction, when many incoming balls into the first entrance 64 are stocked, the incoming sound is finally stocked. The sound of the incoming sound for the incoming ball is pronounced with a large delay from the actual incoming ball, and the difference between the actual incoming ball and the sounding timing of the incoming ball sound becomes remarkable, causing the player to feel uncomfortable. This is because there is a risk of being embraced. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the difference between the actual ball entry and the sounding timing of the ball entry sound is suppressed by setting the stock of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 to three or less. it can.

  If the tempo (number of beats per minute) of the BGM for time reduction is, for example, 160 BPM (beats per mute), the firing of the ball is set to less than 100 balls per minute. Thus, almost no more than three balls are stocked in the first winning port 64. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 is restricted so as not to stock more than three, the entrance to the first entrance 64 where no incoming sound is pronounced can actually occur. In addition, the player does not feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is not pronounced.

  As a result of the processing in S2006, when it is determined that the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2011), and shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demonstration command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as a display demonstration command and a display confirmation command by the processing in S2011, and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the variable display processing (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S1913).

  This fluctuation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and displays the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to cause the display control device 114 to generate a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and to transmit the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control device 114, This is a process for generating a command. In addition, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated with the display of the variable effect, and a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved ball number.

  In the fluctuation display processing, first, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the variation pattern command and the stop type command have not been received from the main control device 110. The variable display process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). The obtained variation pattern type (variation A to F or 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is read out, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b, the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type obtained by the processing in S2103, and the current gaming state (normal state, The detailed variation pattern is determined based on the probable variation state or the time saving state) and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a (S2104).

  The variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 includes only the variation time. However, in S2104, one of various detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time is selected. One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed.

  The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 includes stop types indicated by the stop type commands received up to that time (15R probability change jackpot, 15R normal hit, 2R probability change hit, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back, complete out). It can be determined based on the number of changes.

  For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variable production, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot is indicated as the stop type, the pachinko machine 10 of the pachinko machine 10 is changed from the large hit production after the variable production until the next big hit. It is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state. In addition, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain variable production, when 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type, after the large hit production after the fluctuation production, until 100 fluctuation productions are performed, or the next big success Until, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the time saving state. After 100 fluctuation effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

  In addition, the ending command (command for performing an effect indicating the end of the jackpot) transmitted from the main control device 110 at the end of the jackpot includes the gaming state (probable change state or time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot. In advance, the sound lamp control device 113 may determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the gaming state included in the ending command. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot included in the ending command is the time saving state, the time until the fluctuation effect is performed 100 times is set to the time saving state, and thereafter, until the next jackpot is reached. Judge as normal state.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. Is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to the server (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired in the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 in order to transmit the command to the display control device 114. (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. Further, by receiving the display stop type command, the display control device 114 selects a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type, and when confirming and displaying the fluctuation effect started by the display fluctuation pattern command, The selected stop symbol is displayed.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114, but the BGM being reproduced. Is transmitted at the timing of the beat. The timing of the start of the fluctuation effect is determined by the control of the main controller 110 irrespective of the rhythm of the BGM output by the audio lamp controller 113.

  However, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits the display fluctuation pattern command generated by receiving the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 at the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. Therefore, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is started at the timing of the BGM beat.

  Further, in the display control device 114, in the variation display of the third symbol, various characters appear in accordance with the beat cycle of BGM, an effect image is displayed, a pseudo stop is performed, or the display is not confirmed and displayed. For example, a display data table and an additional data table are defined so that a stop display is performed once.

  Therefore, by starting the variation display of the third symbol in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM, various characters appear, display of effect images, pseudo stop, temporary stop display before final display, and the like. Are performed at the timing of the BGM beat. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if the stop display was performed. Further, various effect images displayed during the fluctuation effect can also be displayed according to the beat of the BGM.

  Therefore, the player can give a sense that the fluctuating effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a rhythmical game can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Then, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223a is reduced by one in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, when the reserved ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball is performed). (S2107), a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball count indicated by the updated reserved ball count counter 223a (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the retained balls by counting the number of the retained ball symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined by the process of S2104 is specified (S2109). In accordance with the data table specified here, the MPU 221 adjusts the sound output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 228 while adjusting to the fluctuation effect of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The operation of the first accessory 87 is controlled.

  Then, a change start command for display for notifying the start of the change effect to the display control device 114 is set (S2110), and the process returns to the main process. The display change start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing of S1902 of the main processing (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the display variation pattern command generated by the processing of S2104 is not transmitted until the timing of the BGM beat, and the third symbol display device 81 uses the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The change display of the third symbol is not executed until the timing of the BGM beat. However, the start timing of the fluctuation effect is determined by the main controller 110 irrespective of the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the main controller 110 transmits a fluctuation pattern command instructing the start of the fluctuation effect. Then, the third symbol display device 81 must start displaying the variation of the third symbol.

  When the pachinko machine 10 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, it temporarily transmits a display fluctuation start command to the display control device 114 by the process of S2110. The display control device 114 receives the display variation start command and performs a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down to start the variation effect. After that, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 at the timing of the BGM beat, thereby starting the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command from the BGM beat timing. Starts the variation display of the third symbol. This allows the player to see as if the fluctuating effect was started in time with the beat of the BGM.

  Next, the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are flowcharts showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908). As described above, the sound editing / output processing is performed according to the data table corresponding to the effect set by the command from the main control device 110, and according to the ball entry state and the operation state of the frame button 22 to the first entrance 64. In response to this, the sound output from the sound output device 226 is specified, the sound output LSI 301 is controlled, and a process of outputting various sounds from the sound output device 226 is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 27, when the execution of the sound editing / output processing is started, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T of the BGM being reproduced (S2121). As described above, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. When the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the beat (S2121: Yes), the BGM being reproduced is displayed. It is determined that the beat timing has been reached, and then the execution of a new effect is determined in accordance with a command from the main control device 110 by, for example, the process of S2109 in the variable display process (see FIG. 26). It is determined whether the data table to be used has been specified (S2122).

  The data table is a table in which various kinds of control information to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 are specified in chronological order. The data table is provided after all the productions whose execution is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. It is a thing.

  In the process of S2122, when it is determined that the data table to be used is specified (S2122: Yes), the use of the specified data table is set (S2123), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S2124), The process moves to S2125.

  The MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized in S2124, and stores various control information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set to be used by the processing in S2123 in the data table storage area. 222b, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation Control of the motor 87e).

  Here, since the setting of the data table to be used is performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM, even if the effect to be executed according to the command from the main control device 110 is determined at an arbitrary timing, the audio output corresponding to the effect is determined. The sound output from the device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat.

  As a result of the process of S2122, if the data table to be used is not specified (S2122: No), the process of S2123 and S2124 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2125.

  In the process of S2125, it is determined whether or not there is a temporarily stored display variation pattern command and a display stop type command by the processes of S2105 and S2106 of the variation display process (see FIG. 26) (S2125). When the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are present in the RAM 223 (S2125), the temporarily stored display variation pattern command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2126) Also, a setting is made to transmit the temporarily stored stop type command for display to the display control device 114 (S2127). Then, the process shifts to S2128. The display change start command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing of S1902 of the main processing (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated by the processing of S2105 and S2106 are not immediately transmitted to the display control device 114 but are reproduced. It is transmitted at the timing of the BGM beat. Thereby, even if the start of the variation effect is determined at an arbitrary timing in the main control device 110, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 by the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is performed. It can be started in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat.

  Then, in the display control device 114, in the variation display of the third symbol, various characters appear in accordance with the beat cycle of the BGM, an effect image is displayed, a pseudo stop is performed, or the display is not confirmed and displayed. For example, a display data table and an additional data table are defined so that a stop display is performed once. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the third symbol in accordance with the timing of the beat of the BGM, various characters appear, display of effect images, pseudo stop, temporary stop display before final display, and the like. , Can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, the player can give a sense that the fluctuating effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a rhythmical game can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  If it is determined in the process of S2125 that the temporarily stored display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are not in the RAM 223 (S2125: No), the processes of S2126 and S2127 are skipped, and the process of S2128 is performed. Move to.

  In the process of S2128, 1 is added to the pointer 223g (S2128), and then, in the data table set by the process of S2123, the control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g is read (S2129). The MPU 221 reads the control information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223g from the data table while counting up the pointer 223g by one. The sound output from the sound output device 226 and the lighting / blinking of the lamp display device 227 by the edit / output process, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (see FIG. 24), and the first accessory editing drive process (S1910). , The operation of the first accessory 87 (the driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e).

  Here, the processing of S2129 is performed at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced. That is, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be increased.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the sound reproduction start information is included in the control information read by the processing of S2129 (S2130). As a result, if there is sound reproduction start information (S2130: Yes), a reproduction start command including information of a sound to start reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 according to the sound reproduction start information (S2131), and the process proceeds to S2132. Transition. The sound output LSI starts reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction start instruction based on the set reproduction start instruction, and outputs the sound from the audio output device 226.

  In the process of S2130, if there is no sound reproduction start information (S2130: No), the process of S2131 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2132. In the process of S2132, it is determined whether or not the control information read by the process of S2129 includes sound reproduction stop information (S2132). As a result, if there is sound reproduction stop information (S2132: Yes), a reproduction stop command including information of a sound for stopping reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301 according to the sound reproduction stop information (S2133), and the process proceeds to S2134. Transition. The sound output LSI stops reproduction of the sound indicated by the reproduction stop command based on the set reproduction stop command.

  Here, in the control information read from the data table in the processing of S2129, the instruction to start or stop the reproduction of the sound is a sound other than the BGM. That is, for the sounds other than BGM, the processing of S2130 to S2133 allows the sound to be started and stopped at the timing of the beat of the BGM, thereby allowing the player to play a rhythmic game. Regarding the start and stop of the BGM sound, regardless of the timing of the BGM beat, the BGM that has been reproduced up to that point becomes the BGM change timing by the processing of S2143 described later (see FIG. 28). Is stopped, and reproduction of a new BGM is started.

  If it is determined that there is no sound reproduction stop information by the process of S2132 (S2132: No), the process of S2133 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2134. If the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the BGM beat cycle T (S2121: No) by the process of S2121, the process of S2122 to S2133 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2134.

  In the process of S2134, it is determined whether or not the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on (S2134). If the time-saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is on (S2134: Yes), a start winning sound output process is executed (S2135). ). The start winning prize sound output process includes, when the BGM for time saving is reproduced as the BGM, the incoming sound for notifying the first entrance 64 of the incoming ball at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. This is a process of generating one of the constituent sounds of the time saving BGM chord at a pitch. Details of the start winning prize sound output processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  In the processing of S2134, when it is determined that the BGM reproduction flag for time saving 223c is off (S2134: No), or after the start winning prize sound output processing (S2135) is executed, then the frame button operation effect flag 223e is turned on. It is determined whether it is (S2136). As a result, if the frame button operation effect flag 223e is on (S2136: Yes), a frame button operation sound output process is executed (S2137). In the frame button operation sound output processing, when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM being reproduced at that time. In this process, one of the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that time is generated at the pitch of the operation sound for notifying that the operation has been performed. The frame button operation sound output processing is configured by the same processing as the start winning sound output processing, and details thereof will be described after the description of the start winning sound output processing.

  In the process of S2136, when it is determined that the frame button operation effect flag 223e is off (S2136: No), or after the frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed, then, the process of S2138 shown in FIG. Move to. In the process of S2138, it is determined whether or not the control information read out by the process of S2129 (see FIG. 27) includes the start information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138). If there is start information of an effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to ON, and the frame button operation number counter 223f is initialized to 0. (S2139). As a result, the above-described frame button operation sound output process (S2137) is executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated during an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22, the operation sound is the beat of the BGM or the back beat. The process output at the timing is executed.

  In the processing of S2138, when it is determined that there is no production start information that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2138: No), or after the processing of S2139 is performed, then, S2129 (see FIG. 27) It is determined whether or not the end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is included in the control information read by the process (S2140). Then, if there is end information of the effect that requires operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: Yes), the frame button operation effect flag 223e is set to off (S2141). Thus, the execution of the process of outputting the operation sound of the frame button 22 at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat is completed.

  In the process of S2140, when it is determined that there is no end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), or after the process of S2141 is executed, the value of the timer counter 223h is then reduced. It is updated (S2142). Updating of the timer counter 223h is set to 1 when the value of the timer counter 223h is the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, and when the value of the timer counter 223h is different from the period T, One is added to the timer counter 223h. Thus, the timer counter 223h can count the number of beats of the BGM being reproduced.

  Here, the tempo of each BGM is predetermined so that the period T of the beat is a multiple of 2 milliseconds. Accordingly, the timing of the BGM beat and the timing of the back beat can be easily determined simply by performing the process of adding 1 to the timer counter 223h every millisecond.

  Next, it is determined whether it is a BGM change timing (S2143). As the change timing of the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when the big hit is notified of the big hit, the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the big hit production BGM output at the time of the big hit effect, fluctuations In the effect, the reach effect is started, and there are a timing for starting the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, a timing for ending the reproduction of the reach effect BGM, and the like. These timings are grasped in accordance with control information specified in a data table set at each time and a command received from main controller 110.

  If it is determined by the processing of S2143 that the timing of changing the BGM is reached (S2143), the reproduction start that specifies the BGM specified by the control information in the data table or the BGM corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110 is started. The command is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2144). Thereby, the reproduction of the designated BGM is started and output from the audio output device 226.

  Next, the tempo of the BGM of the type at which the reproduction is started is read out from the ROM 222, the cycle T (millisecond) of the beat of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the RAM 223 (S2145). At this time, the beat cycle T (millisecond) is calculated by calculating 6000 milliseconds / (BGM tempo). In the case where the period of the BGM beat T (milliseconds) is defined in advance in the ROM 222 instead of the BGM tempo, in the process of S2145, the period of the BGM beat of the type to be reproduced is read from the ROM 222. You just have to put it out.

  Further, the timer counter 223h is initialized to 1 (S2146). By updating this timer counter 223h while counting up in the sound editing / output processing executed every 1 millisecond and counting up to the BGM beat cycle T calculated in the processing of S2145, the MPU 221 By using the timer counter 223h, the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced can be grasped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM to be played is the time saving BGM (S2147). If it is the time saving BGM (S2147: Yes), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to ON (S2148). If it is not the time saving BGM (S2148: No), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off (S2149). Thereby, while the time saving BGM is being reproduced as the BGM, the incoming sound for notifying of the incoming ball to the first entrance 64 is changed to the beat of the time saving BGM by the processing of S2134 and S2135 (see FIG. 27). A start winning prize sound output process reproduced at the timing is executed.

  After the processing of S2148 or S2149 ends, the sound editing / output processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing. Also, as a result of the processing in S2143, when it is determined that it is not the timing to change the BGM (S2143: No), the sound editing / output processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, the start winning sound output processing (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts showing the start winning prize sound output processing (S2135). The start winning prize sound output processing is, as described above, when the time-saving BGM is reproduced as the BGM, the arrival of the ball to the first entrance 64 is notified at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. In this process, one of the constituent sounds of the time saving BGM chord at that time is generated at a pitch.

  Referring to FIG. 29, in the start winning prize sound output process, first, it is determined whether or not the prize sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151). The prize sound immediate reproduction effect does not output the prize sound at the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM in the fluctuation effect, but when the ball enters the first entrance port 64, This is an effect in which a pitching sound is output at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the timing of the BGM beat or backbeat, and is one of the announcement effects that suggest that the degree of expectation of a jackpot is high. Whether or not to execute the prize sound immediate reproduction effect is determined based on a detailed variation pattern determined in the variation display process (see FIG. 26).

  The player normally outputs a pitching sound corresponding to the code of the time saving BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the time saving BGM, whereas the prize sound instant reproduction effect is executed. The incoming sound deviates from the rhythm of the BGM for time savings, and is pronounced at a pitch of a predetermined pitch, thereby recognizing that a high degree of expectation to be a big hit in the fluctuating effect is recognized, and increasing interest in the game. be able to.

  When the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is being executed (S2151: Yes), it is determined whether or not the starting winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152). If the starting winning counter 223d is 0 (S2152: Yes), there is no ball entering the first entrance 64, and the starting winning sound output process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the start winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2152), it means that there is a ball in the first entrance 64, and therefore, the reproduction start command of the starting winning sound with the pitch set to a predetermined pitch. Is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2153). As a result, the winning sound of a predetermined pitch is output from the audio output device 226 without waiting for the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. Next, the starting winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2154), and the starting winning sound output process is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2151, if it is determined that the winning sound immediate reproduction effect is not executed (S2151: No), then, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM for time saving. Is determined (S2155). As a result, when the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the cycle T (S2155: Yes), the timing of the beat of the BGM for time saving is the timing, so that the incoming sound corresponding to the incoming ball to the first entrance 64 is sounded. Execute the process for First, it is determined whether or not the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156).

  If the value of the start winning counter 223d is not 0 (S2156: No), a process of sounding the incoming sound is executed because the incoming ball to the first inlet 64 is stocked. First, it is determined whether or not the chord is changed from the current beat in the BGM being reproduced (S2157). The progress of the time saving BGM code is stored in the ROM 222, and the MPU 221 grasps the beat code of the BGM according to the progress of the playback of the time saving BGM.

  Here, the progress of the code of the BGM for time saving stored in the ROM 222 is associated with the elapsed time from the start of the reproduction of the BGM, and the code of the BGM from the elapsed time is defined. For example, code "D" is associated with elapsed time 0 ms, code "G" is associated with elapsed time 720 ms, and code "A" is associated with elapsed time 1440 ms. "D" is associated with the elapsed time of 2160 milliseconds, and the association is completed. When the MPU 221 starts playing back the BGM audio, the MPU 221 monitors the playback elapsed time, and immediately changes the BGM code to “D” from immediately after the BGM playback is started until the playback elapsed time of the BGM reaches 720 milliseconds. Until the BGM playback start time changes from 720 ms to 1440 ms, and the BGM code changes to "G". The BGM playback start time changes from 1440 ms to 2160 ms. It is determined that the code is “A”. When the BGM playback start time reaches 2160 milliseconds, the BGM code is determined to be "D", the BGM playback elapsed time is reset to 0 ms, and the BGM playback elapsed time is returned again. , While determining the BGM code at that time. This makes it possible to accurately grasp the progress of the chord for the BGM in which the same melody is repeatedly reproduced.

  When the chord is changed from the current beat (S2157: Yes), a reproduction start command of the incoming ball sound with the pitch being the root sound of the chord is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2159), and the process shifts to S2166. The root sound of a chord is a fundamental sound in the chord. By the processing in S2159, the incoming sound having the pitch as the root sound of the chord is output from the sound output device 226. If a pitch other than the root note of the chord is output at the timing of the beat at which the BGM chord is changed, the player recognizes that sound as a sound deviating from the chord and feels a sense of discomfort to the player. May be caused. On the other hand, by causing the incoming sound having the root sound as the pitch to be emitted, the player can hear the incoming sound as a sound that matches the changed code. Therefore, a sound that is comfortable for the player can be heard.

  If the chord is not changed at the current beat as a result of the processing in S2157 (S2157: No), it is then determined whether or not the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is on (S2160). As a result, if the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is off (S2160: No), the chord information at the current beat is read from the ROM 222, and the pitch to be used as the pitch of one winning sound from the constituent tones constituting the chord is read. Is selected (S2161), a reproduction start instruction of a winning sound with the selected constituent sound as a pitch is set in the sound output LSI (S2162), and the process shifts to S2166.

  As a result, a winning sound having the pitch of the constituent sounds of the chord is output from the audio output device 226. In addition, the incoming sound is not only generated in accordance with the beat of the BGM for time reduction, but also generated at a pitch matching the chord of the BGM for time reduction at that time. Therefore, the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the BGM for time reduction, so that the player can hear a more comfortable sound. In addition, when the ball continues to enter the first ball entrance 64, a melody accompanied by time-saving BGM is composed of the incoming sound, and the player can hear the melody. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entered balls. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melodies played by the incoming sound at different times.

  As a result of the processing in S2160, when it is determined that the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is ON (S2160: Yes), it is determined that the incoming sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch is generated at the timing of the immediately preceding back beat. In this case, at the timing of the beat, a pitching sound having a pitch corresponding to the sound that has been generated is emitted. More specifically, the pitch reproduced at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2163), and the sound to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced at the previous beat for the current BGM code is read. The pitch is selected from the pitch setting table 222c during elapsed sound reproduction (S2164). Then, the reproduction start command of the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2165), and the process shifts to S2166.

  Here, if a chord at a beat of a certain BGM is "C" and a pitching sound with a pitch of the constituent note "mi" is generated at that time, the pitch "mi" is stored in a pitch information memory. 223k. When the incoming pitch sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code "C" is to be generated at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the pitch of the incoming pitch sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k ( In this example, the pitch of the elapsed sound corresponding to the constituent sound “mi” is specified from the pitch setting table 222c during playback of the elapsed sound in the code “C”. In the present embodiment, “fa” is specified as the pitch of the elapsed sound, and the incoming sound having the elapsed sound “fa” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the back beat.

  Then, even when the incoming pitch sound having the pitch of the constituent sound of the code “C” is generated at the timing of the next BGM beat following the back beat (that is, when the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is on), From the pitch information memory 223k, the pitch of the incoming ball sound generated at the immediately preceding beat is read (in this example, "mi"), and in the code "C", the configuration at the next beat corresponding to the constituent tone "mi" The pitch of the sound is specified from the elapsed sound reproduction time pitch setting table 222c. In the present embodiment, “so” is specified as the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat, and the incoming sound having the constituent sound “so” as the pitch is generated at the timing of the next beat.

  Thereby, in each of the first BGM beat, the subsequent back beat, and the subsequent beat, the incoming sound is generated in the order of "mi", "fa", and "so" in accordance with the BGM code "C". Therefore, in the case of a back beat between the beats at which the pitching sound that pitches the constituent sounds of the chord is pronounced and the pitching sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is pronounced, the strange pitch change It is possible to suppress the generation of a sound or the generation of a pitch that deviates from the elapsed sound generated by the back beat in a beat after the back beat. Therefore, when the incoming sound is emitted while inserting the elapsed sound, a beautiful melody can be played.

  In the processing of S2166, the pitch reproduced as a winning sound is stored in the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2159, S2162, and S2165 (S2166). Then, since one incoming sound for the incoming ball into the first incoming port 64 has been emitted, the starting winning counter 223d is decremented by one (S2167). After that, the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is set to off (S2168), and the start winning sound output processing ends.

  As a result of the processing in S2156, when the value of the start winning counter 223d is 0 (S2156: Yes), since the ball entering the first entrance 64 is not stocked, the elapsed sound generation flag 223j is turned off ( S2168), the start winning sound output processing ends.

  As a result of the processing in S2155, when the value of the timer counter 223h is not the cycle T of the BGM beat (S2156: No), then, referring to FIG. 30, the value of the timer counter 223h is half of the cycle of the BGM beat. It is determined whether or not T / 2 is satisfied (S2169). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 223h is not T / 2 (S2169: No), the start winning sound output processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter 223h is T / 2 (S2169: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being reproduced, and then the start winning counter 223d is larger than 1 and is the last beat. It is determined whether the incoming sound has been generated (S2170).

  If the start winning counter 223d is equal to or smaller than 1, or if the pitching sound has not been generated at the immediately preceding beat (S2170: No), the start winning sound output processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the start winning counter 223d is larger than 1 and the pitching sound is generated at the immediately preceding beat (S2170: Yes), then the code information of the previous beat and the code information of the next beat are stored in the ROM 222. (S2171), and determines whether or not the code information of the previous beat matches the code information of the next beat (S2172).

  As a result, if the code information of the previous beat matches the code information of the next beat (S2172: Yes), the pitch of the incoming ball sound reproduced at the previous beat is read from the pitch information memory 223k (S2173). The pitch to be reproduced corresponding to the pitch reproduced at the previous beat with respect to the current chord is selected from the pitch setting table 222c at the time of elapsed sound reproduction (S2174). Then, a reproduction start command of the winning sound having the selected pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2175). As a result, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, the winning sound of the pitch selected from the pitch setting table 222c during reproduction of the elapsed sound is output from the audio output device 226.

  Here, the pitch of the incoming ball sound output at the timing of the BGM beat is a constituent sound of the chord, whereas the pitch of the incoming pitch sound is selected by the elapsed sound playback pitch setting table 222c at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord. Thus, when the ball continuously enters the first entrance 64, not only the standard sound of the chord but also the backing beat of the BGM is used to make the incoming sound sound while inserting the elapsed sound of the chord. Therefore, a more complicated melody can be played by the incoming sound. Therefore, the interest of the player can be increased.

  Further, based on the pitch of the pitching sound generated at the previous beat, the pitch of the pitching sound generated at the back beat of the BGM is determined by the pitch setting table 222c during reproduction of the elapsed sound. The pitch of the incoming sound to be pronounced on the beat is also determined. Thereby, in the case of the back beat between the beats at which the incoming pitch sound that pitches the constituent sound of the chord is pronounced, when the incoming pitch tone that has the pitch of the elapsed sound is pronounced, the strange pitch It is possible to suppress the generation of an elapsed sound or the generation of a pitch that deviates from the elapsed sound generated on the back beat in a beat after the back beat. Therefore, when the incoming sound is emitted while inserting the elapsed sound, a beautiful melody can be played.

  Next, the elapsed sound generation flag 223j indicating that the elapsed sound has been generated is set to ON (S2176), and since the incoming sound corresponding to the incoming ball has been generated, the value of the start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2179). ), The start winning sound output process ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2172, if the code information of the previous beat does not match the code information of the next beat (S2172: No), the current BGM code information is read from the ROM 222, and the constituent sounds constituting the code are read out. , The pitch of the one incoming sound is selected (S2177), and a reproduction start instruction of the incoming sound with the selected constituent sound as the pitch is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2178). If the elapsed sound of the chord is output here, the chord is changed at the next beat, and the elapsed sound becomes a floating sound, and the player hears a strange melody. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the chord information of the previous beat does not match the chord information of the next beat by the processing of S2177 and S2178, the incoming pitch of the back beat of the BGM is changed to the pitch component sound. Since the sound is output from the audio output device 226, the player can hear a beautiful melody according to the chord.

  After the processing of S2178, the value of the start winning counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2179), and the start winning sound output processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, a description will be given of the sounding timing of the ball entry sound when the start winning sound output processing is executed. First, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when one ball enters the first entrance port 64 one by one during one beat of the BGM. As shown in FIG. 31, in this case, the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 in the middle of the BGM beat is stocked, and the incoming sound is generated at the timing of the BGM beat. At this time, at the timing of the first beat at which the chord is changed, an incoming pitch sound whose pitch is the root sound (“C” in the example of FIG. 31) of the chord (“C” in the example of FIG. 31) is generated. Thereafter, unless the chord is changed, a pitching sound with a pitch of the constituent sounds of the chord (in the example of FIG. 31, any of "do", "mi", and "so") is generated.

  As described above, the incoming sound is generated in synchronism with the beat of the BGM for time saving, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM for time reduction, so that the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, when the incoming sound is generated, the pitch of the incoming sound is determined based on the code of the BGM for time saving at the sound generation timing. Specifically, one pitch is selected from the pitches of the constituent sounds constituting the chord as the pitch of the incoming ball sound. As a result, the incoming sound is not only generated in time with the beat of the BGM for time reduction, but also generated at a pitch that matches the code of the BGM for time reduction at that time. Therefore, the chord is composed of the incoming sound and the BGM for time reduction, so that the player can hear a more comfortable sound.

  Next, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing the sounding timing of the incoming sound when three balls enter the first entrance 64 during one beat of the BGM, and FIG. ) Indicates that two balls enter the first entrance port 64 during one beat of BGM, and one more ball enters the first entrance port 64 until the next back beat. FIG. 32 (c) is a diagram for explaining the sounding timing of the pitching sound when the ball hits the ball. FIG. 32 (c) shows that one ball hits the first ball entry port 64 during a certain beat of the BGM. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the sounding timing of a ball entry sound when two more balls enter the first entry port 64 before the next back beat.

  In the case of FIGS. 32A to 32C, in each case, one to three balls correspond to one of the balls at the timing of the next beat of one beat that entered the first entrance 64. The incoming sound is emitted with the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord at the beat timing. Next, at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, there are two or more balls in the first entrance 64 in the stock in which the incoming sound is not sounded, and the incoming sound is sounded in the immediately preceding beat. The incoming sound is pronounced on condition that it is performed. That is, in each of the examples of FIGS. 32A to 32C, the incoming sound is generated with the back beat of BGM. Then, at the timing of the beat next to the back beat, the incoming ball sound is further pronounced.

  Here, as a condition for sounding the incoming sound at the timing of the back beat of the BGM, there are two or more balls in the first entrance 64 in the stock in which the incoming sound is not sounded. The condition that the incoming sound was pronounced at the immediately preceding beat is that the incoming sound is continuously emitted at the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat. is there. Accordingly, when the ball is continuously entered into the first entrance 64, not only the timing of the beat, but also the previous beat, the current back beat, and the next beat continuously. By making the incoming sound sound, more various rhythms can be engraved with the incoming sound. In addition, since the incoming sound is not emitted in the beat but the incoming sound is emitted in the back beat, it is possible to suppress an impression that the rhythm of the incoming sound does not correspond to BGM.

  Also, in two beats, a pitch sound having a pitch of the constituent sound of the chord is produced, and in a back beat between these two beats, a pitch sound having a pitch of the elapsed sound of the constituent sound of the chord is generated. Pronounced. Thereby, the incoming sound is generated while inserting the incoming sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound between the incoming sounds whose pitch is the component sound of the BGM chord while matching the rhythm of the BGM. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give a variation to the melody by the incoming sound accompanied by the BGM for time reduction. Therefore, the melody due to the incoming sound is not monotonous, and a sound output that does not make the player tired can be performed.

  In the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 27), details of the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) executed when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed are described in detail. This is almost the same as the sound output processing (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Specifically, the start winning prize counter 223d used in the start prize sound output processing is replaced with a frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound generated by replacing the winning sound with the operation sound is the frame button operation sound output processing. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, the same operation and effect as the winning sound output by the start winning sound output processing can be achieved in the operation sound.

  In particular, since the operation sound is generated in synchronism with the BGM beat, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  When the operation sound is generated, the pitch of the operation sound is determined based on the BGM code at the sound generation timing. Therefore, by operating the frame button 22, a melody is played by the operation sound, so that a sound output that does not tire the player can be performed.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a MPU 231 that detects a V interruption signal. There is a V interrupt process that is executed in the event of a V interrupt. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. I do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Also, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

  After the process of S2401, interruption permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt processing, first, the command determination processing (S2602) is executed, and then the display setting processing (S2603) is executed. In the command determination processing (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern is determined. The display data table for fluctuation is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect or the like selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed in the third mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2603), the address indicated by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602) and the like. According to the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified.

  Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2604). In this task process, based on the content of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2605). In this drawing processing, a drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task processing (S2604), and the drawing list is generated. This is transmitted to the image controller 237. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2606, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R certain change big hit, 2R certain change big hit, 15R normal big hit, out of front and rear reach, out of front and rear out) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete departure) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2602), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing, will be described. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interruption process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination processing, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination processing is terminated. The process returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S2703).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2704). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S2704: Yes), the reserved ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36 (a), the details of the reserved ball count command process (S2705) will be described. FIG. 36 (a) is a flowchart showing the pending ball count command processing. The reserved ball count command process executes a process corresponding to the display reserved ball count command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball count command processing, first, a new reserved ball count command flag is turned on (S2801). The new reserved ball count command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the display reserved ball count command has been processed in the ON state. Next, information on the number of reserved balls included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S2802).

  In the process of S2802, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. Thereby, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

  Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2802 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of other reserved balls is turned off. (S2803), and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the reserved ball count corresponding to the set number discrimination flag set to on is a small area. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed on Ds1.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2704 that there is no display pending ball count command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2706: Yes), a confirmation command process is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the determination command processing (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the fixed command processing. This determination command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display determination command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command processing (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this processing ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect on the third symbol display device 81 is started. . Also, after processing the display setting of the variable effect, if the confirmed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect (the third symbol is swung up and down). The display setting process is performed so that the effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing of the beat of the BGM, it appears as if the variable effect was stopped and displayed. In this spurious display, a fluctuation table display data table is defined for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat by the fluctuation display data table described later. It is realized by. In the present embodiment, thereafter, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing comes, and the original fluctuation time is secured. This allows the player to perceive that the variable effect has been stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, and thus allows the player to play a game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demonstration command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S2708: Yes), a demo command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the demo command processing (S2709) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 36C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command process executes a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S2709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear its contents (S2822).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the set command flag is set to off, the demonstration display flag is set to on, the set display flag is set to off (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2821 is updated. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect specified in the demonstration display data table is measured using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. If it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table has been completed by the timing of the display setting control time counter 233e based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the Is controlled so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  If both the confirmed command and the demonstration command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of the execution of the command determination processing, the above-described confirmed command processing (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmed command flag is turned on. Then, the demonstration command processing (S2709) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the processing of S2825.

  Thus, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. The main control device 110 is configured to transmit the demonstration command unless the start timing of the fluctuation effect is reached after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. At the start of the execution of the command determination process, it is impossible that both the determination command and the demonstration command are stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, if all of these commands are stored in the command buffer area at the start of the execution of the command determination processing, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not performed normally.

  In such a case, the display control device 114 preferentially displays a demonstration effect not directly related to the game on the third symbol display device 81, so that an erroneous confirmed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress giving the player a misunderstanding of the game result. In addition, by starting the demonstration effect without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call the person in charge of the hall and request a coping.

  Referring back to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of SS2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation start command among the unprocessed commands. (S2710) If there is a display change start command (S2710: Yes), a change start command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the change start command processing (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the change start command processing. This change start command process executes a process corresponding to the display change start command received from the audio lamp control device 113. The display change start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 114 when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command instructing start of change from the main control device 110. . The display control device 114 starts the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display variation start command from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the change start command processing, first, a restart display data table corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2826). Next, Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233b to clear its contents (S2827).

  Next, time data corresponding to the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2828), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2829). Then, the set command flag is set to off, the demonstration display flag is set to off, and the set display flag is set to off (S2830), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  As described above, the display control device 114 receives the display change start command, and first displays the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the start of the variable effect is determined by the main control device 110, immediately after the start of the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display of swinging the third symbol up and down. As a result, the fluctuation effect by the third symbol is started.

  On the other hand, after transmitting the display variation start command, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the display variation pattern command to the display control device 114 in synchronization with the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. Upon receiving these display variation pattern commands, the display control device 114 starts execution of the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, and starts high-speed variation of the third symbol. Thereby, it is possible for the player to pretend that the fluctuation effect of the third symbol has been started at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, since the variable effect can be regarded as having started the variable effect along the rhythm of the BGM, the player can play the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

  By setting the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF in the process of S2830, when the start of the variable production is determined by the main control device 110, the demonstration production or the confirmed display production is replaced with the demonstration production or the fixed display production being displayed. Thus, the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, at the start of the execution of the command determination processing, if both the finalization command and the display variation start command are stored in the command buffer area, the above-mentioned finalization command processing (S2707) is executed first, and the finalization command flag is executed. Is set to ON, then the fluctuation start command processing (S2711) is executed, and the fixed command flag is turned off by the processing of S2830.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2710 that there is no display variation start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2712: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2713) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted (S2831). Next, the extracted display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2832, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  If a display data table for fluctuation corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually performed by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 sends a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give a sense of incongruity to the player.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233a as in the present embodiment, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 is issued. Until the (display confirmation command) is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the variable effect. Thus, it is possible to continue watching the fluctuation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 without feeling uncomfortable until the stop display of the third symbol is determined.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, time data representing the time when the display is controlled by the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 is set in the time counter 233e (S2834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the set command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the set display flag are all set to off (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2835, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832 is updated. Then, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233e in which the fluctuation time data is set by the process of S2834, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is measured. Is determined to have ended, a finalization display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a finalization command (a finalization command for display) is received from the main controller 110. If the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is not received after the end of the variable effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing of the beat of the BGM, it appears as if the fluctuation effect was stopped and displayed, and this apparent display is represented by the BGM of the BGM by the display data table for fluctuation. This is realized by defining the display data table for fluctuation for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the beat timing. In the present embodiment, after the stop display of the apparent fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the fluctuation table display data table, the restart effect is displayed until the original confirmed display timing comes. And the original fluctuation time is secured. This allows the player to perceive that the variable effect has been stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, and thus allows the player to play a game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

  Further, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display variation command Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination process, the determination of the presence or absence of the display determination command is performed first, so that the determination command process, which is a process corresponding to the display determination command, is always executed first. The processing corresponding to the use variation pattern command is executed later, and the determination command flag set by the display determination command can be turned off by overwriting as in the processing of S2836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in this command determination processing, the presence / absence of the display demonstration command is determined first, so that the demonstration command processing corresponding to the display demonstration command is always executed first, while the display demonstration command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demo command is overwritten to the variation display data table by overwriting, as in the process of S2832. Can be. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Furthermore, both the display variation start command and the display variation pattern command may be stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands. This is a case where the timing of the fluctuation start determined by the main controller 110 and the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced are aligned. In this case, if the process corresponding to the display variation start command is prioritized, the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command is not performed, and the process is performed until the restart effect associated with the display variation start command is confirmed and displayed. Would.

  On the other hand, in the present command determination process, since the presence / absence of the display variation start command is determined first, the demo command process, which is a process corresponding to the display variation start command, is always executed first. Then, the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the variation display data table is set by overwriting the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display variation start command as in the process of S2832. Can be rewritten as Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display variation start command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the process of S2712 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S2714: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of 15R certain jackpot, 2R certain jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, special stop symbol) ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2843), and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time, the process of S2842 is performed as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by (1) is described. In the above-described task processing (S2604), after the above-described predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2843, and the identification is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, a third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, even if it is actually off, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, the player may be mistaken for the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to be a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol that is completely deviated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of a big hit in practice. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 35, if it is determined in the processing of S2714 that there is no display stop type command (S2714: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2722), and the processing of S2701 is performed. Return to

  In the processing of S2701 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2702 to S2722 again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No) ), And terminates this command determination processing.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2901: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S2902 to S2904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S2901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S2902). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by each processing of S2904.

  In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball count command flag is ON (S2903). If the new pending ball count command flag is ON (S2903: Yes), the display command is displayed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and a reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

  Here, the details of the reserved image setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting processing. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, this is a process for expanding the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, referring to the number discrimination flag, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). ) Is developed (S2951). In the task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the reserved image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle is specified for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new reserved ball count command is set to off (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the pending image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new pending ball count command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2903: No), then , To S2905.

  In S2905, a pointer update process is performed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233c that specifies the address where the corresponding drawing content should be obtained from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. This is the process of performing

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, the pointer 233c is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with the data stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233c is updated by the processing of S2981, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is determined (S2982). As a result, if it is End information (S2982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2983), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and further corresponds to the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S2985), and the flow shifts to the process of S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2983, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2986), and the flow shifts to the process of S2987. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a fluctuation display data table and a fixed display data table are set in the display data table buffer 233a, , And End information are always rendered, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2982, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the processing of S2981 is not End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2982: No) ), Skip the processing of S2983 to S2986, and shift to the processing of S2987.

  In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2987). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2987: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the end information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S2988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2989), and returns to the display setting process. Thus, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table can be developed and the start of the confirmation display effect can be controlled.

  Referring back to FIG. 39, after the pointer update processing (S2905), the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b are indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update processing. The drawing content of the address to be drawn is developed (S2906). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2906 together with the previously expanded reserved image, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed on the assumption that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a determination command (display determination command) is issued from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, and in the subsequent process of S2913, it is confirmed whether or not the fixed command flag is on (S2913).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the final display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol discrimination flag is determined, the final display data table of that mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the finalized display is set in the time counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the determination command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and then the determination display flag indicating that the determination display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918), and the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly used as the work RAM 233. (S2919) and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a determination command (determination for display) is issued from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. Command), the drawn content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is started from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table starts. Until a predetermined time elapses from this time, symbol offset information from the stopped symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is defined. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information defined in the above-described display data table for fluctuation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2913, if the finalization command flag is not on but off (S2913: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S2920 shown in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the finalization display flag is on (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) indicates that the confirmed display effect has ended, and the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S2921), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of data display is set in the time counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  By this, by the end of the final display effect, if the display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of the next fluctuation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect has not been received, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The branch condition of S2920: Yes is satisfied when the confirmed display effect is being performed. In this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233b are cleared by the processing of S2914. Therefore, in the processing of S2922, the clear processing of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2920, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S2920: No), then it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2926). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S2912 (S2912: Yes) indicates that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting processing ends as it is. Return to the interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2926, if the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2926: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2929). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display data table is specified for a time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is apparently stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat. I do. Then, after the apparent stop is displayed, by setting the restart display data table by the processing of S2929, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing comes, and the original display effect is displayed. Secure fluctuation time. This allows the player to perceive that the variable effect has been stopped along the rhythm of the BGM, and thus allows the player to play a game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM.

  Further, in the display control device 114, even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol has been stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, a confirmation command (from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113). When the display confirmation command is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect in which an image obtained by vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By visually checking that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

  After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the drawing content is developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update processing described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, in the restart effect, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner of vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary for swinging and displaying at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by setting the restart effect to an effect in which the third symbol is vibrated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the restart symbol data table is swung at least once by the third symbol. Since only the drawing content necessary for display needs to be stored, the capacity required to store the restart display data table can be reduced.

  Also, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 39 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A fixed display data table is set in 233a. Thereby, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Also, when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. A display data table for fluctuation is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. A demonstration display data table is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The restart effect is an effect that is displayed when the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, and then a final command (display final command) from the main control device 110, which should be originally received, is not received. Therefore, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demonstration command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2605), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, and filter designation information), a drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information).

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, information for instructing to develop the drawn image is included in the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information. When the drawing buffer flag is 0, information for instructing to develop the drawn image is included in the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as the drawing buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  After the process of S3002, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag (S3003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Will be Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 34B) is executed. Accordingly, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read, and image drawing is performed. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the drawing processing of the image of one frame is completed, and the image of one frame is The first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer are alternately designated every 20 milliseconds for a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. Thus, the display processing of the image of one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the drawing processing of the image of one frame is performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball (starting winning) is detected in the first entrance 64, the player is notified that the ball has been entered. The incoming sound is output according to the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player of the operation is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat.

  Thus, the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, so that a sound having a rhythmic sense is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, when a pitching sound or an operation sound is generated, the pitch of the pitching sound or the operation sound is determined by using a constituent sound or an elapsed sound of a BGM chord (chord) at the sound generation timing. As a result, not only the pitching sound and the operation sound are generated in synchronism with the beat of the BGM, but also the pitch is adjusted to the pitch of the BGM at that time. Therefore, the melody with BGM can be composed of the incoming sound and the operation sound, and the player can listen to the melody. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating the ball, the number of entered balls and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melody played by the incoming sound and the operation sound at each time.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down is performed on the third symbol display device 81 from the original variation start timing to the timing of the BGM beat. (Symbol shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original variation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation production is started at that timing, In the three-symbol display device 81, high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started.

  Here, a display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Further, the output from the sound output device 226 of the sound in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are specified in the data table, and these are also set in accordance with the BGM beat. Done.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat shortly before the original fixed display is performed, and it is also confirmed that the stopped symbol is displayed. The sound output device 226 produces a stop sound to be represented. Thereafter, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down (a symbol shaking period) until the original finalized display timing is reached, and the third symbol is finally displayed at the original finalized display timing.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started irrespective of the beat of the BGM and is definitely displayed, but in the present embodiment, the high-speed fluctuation is started according to the timing of the beat, and once, Perform stop display. A display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down as a symbol swinging period from the initial variation start timing to the start of the high-speed variation and from the temporary stop display to the original final display timing. Do.

  Thus, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if a stop display was performed. Also, various effect images displayed during the fluctuation effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and furthermore, output of sound in accordance with the fluctuation effect, lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and furthermore, The movement of the one accessory 87 can also be performed according to the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the player can give a sense that the fluctuating effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a rhythmical game can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the timing of changing the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when notifying the big hit and the big hit effect BGM output at the time of the big hit effect Once the BGM is changed, for example, at the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the music, the BGM continues to be reproduced irrespective of the start and stop of the fluctuation effect, and the fake start of the fluctuation effect (start of high-speed fluctuation) and the appearance of the fluctuation effect are started. The case where the stop display (temporary stop of the third symbol) is executed at the timing of the BGM beat has been described.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a case will be described in which the reproduction of the BGM is started at the start of the variable effect, and the reproduction of the BGM is ended at the end of the variable effect.

  In the second embodiment, a data table set when a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined defines sound reproduction start information and sound reproduction end information of BGM according to the fluctuation effect. Specifically, the sound reproduction start information of the BGM is specified at the first address (0001H) of the data table. The BGM sound reproduction end information is defined in the data table in association with the address corresponding to the time at which the fluctuation effect based on the detailed fluctuation pattern ends. Further, at the address where the sound reproduction end information of the BGM is specified, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the fluctuation effect has been stopped is also specified.

  By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts reproduction of the BGM at the start of the fluctuation effect, ends reproduction of the BGM at the end of the fluctuation effect, and generates a stop sound of the fluctuation effect. Will be done.

  Here, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the stop sound of the fluctuation effect is also generated at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is stopped in synchronization with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, the fluctuation effect can be ended rhythmically, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variable display processing (S1913), the sound editing / output processing (S1909), the start winning sound output processing (S2133), and the frame button operation performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The difference from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that a part of the ON output process is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, other various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and display Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the variable display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S1913).

  In the variation display process, first, similarly to the first embodiment, after performing the processes of S2101 to S2104, a display for notifying the display controller 114 of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104 is performed. A variation pattern command is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S3501). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

  Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process (S1902) executed subsequently in the main process (see FIG. 24). Is done.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are transmitted to the display control device 113 immediately. Instead, it temporarily stores the data in the RAM 223, and instead transmits a display variation start command to the display control device 113, and starts a variation effect by starting a restart effect. By transmitting the fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command to the display control device 113 and starting the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation effect is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM apparently. In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command and a stop type command are received from the main control device 110, The timing for display generated by the variation pattern command and stop type commands for display immediately transmitted to the display control unit 113 starts the fast variation of the fluctuation effect.

  After the process of S3502, the same processes of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment are performed, and then a data table determined by the process of S2104 and corresponding to the detailed variation pattern is set (S3503). Then, the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3504), and the variable display processing ends.

  As a result, the MPU 221 sequentially counts up the pointer 223g initialized by the processing of S3504, and transfers various control information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the data table set by the processing of S3403 to the data table. It is read out from the storage area 222b, and according to the control information, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory Control of the rotation motor 87e).

  Here, the reading of various control information from the data table is performed at the timing of the BGM beat in the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 45), as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started at the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the player can play the game rhythmically. You can enjoy. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by the player.

  Also, as described above, the BGM sound reproduction start information is defined in the first address (0001H) of the data table, and the BGM sound reproduction end information corresponds to the address corresponding to the time at which the fluctuation effect by the detailed fluctuation pattern ends. It is specified in the data table. Further, at the address where the sound reproduction end information of the BGM is specified, the sound reproduction start information of the stop sound indicating that the fluctuation effect has been stopped is also specified. By referring to this data table, the MPU 221 starts reproduction of the BGM at the start of the fluctuation effect, ends reproduction of the BGM at the end of the fluctuation effect, and generates a stop sound of the fluctuation effect. Will be done. Here, in the second embodiment, since the fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the fluctuation effect stops. Sound is also generated at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is stopped in synchronization with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, the fluctuation effect can be ended rhythmically, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  Next, the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908).

  In this sound editing / output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the pointer 223g is 0 (S3511). Then, if the pointer 233g is not 0 (S3511: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced (S2121). As described above in the description of the first embodiment, the timer counter 223h is a counter for counting the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced. When the value of the timer counter 223h is equal to the period T of the beat as a result of the process of S2121 (S2121: Yes), it is determined that the timing of the beat has been reached in the BGM being reproduced, and the process proceeds to S2128, where 1 is added (S2128), and control information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223g after addition is read from the set data table (S2129). Thereafter, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Thereby, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 in accordance with various control information specified in the data table. Is controlled.

  If it is determined that the pointer 233g is 0 as a result of the processing in S3531 (S3531: Yes), it is immediately after the data table is set by the MPU 221 and thus the determination processing in S2121 is skipped and S2128 is left as it is. Move to the processing of. In other words, immediately after the data table is set, BGM reproduction has not been started, so that it is not possible to determine the timing of the beat of the BGM in the determination processing of S2121. Therefore, when the pointer 233g is 0, the process directly proceeds to the process of S2128, and the audio output from the audio output device 226, the lamp display device, and the like in accordance with various control information specified in the first address (0001H) of the data table. The lighting / flashing of 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

  Here, the data table is set by the MPU 221 at, for example, a timing at which a variable effect is started. Therefore, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 can be started simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a description will be given of the startup winning sound output process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the startup winning sound output processing (S2122).

  In the start winning sound output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer 223g is 1 (S3521). If the value of the pointer 223g is not 1 (S3521: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S2151, and thereafter, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Thus, when a ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 is detected, the incoming sound that informs the player that there is an incoming ball is adjusted to the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. Output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, when the incoming sound is pronounced, the pitch of the incoming sound is determined by using the constituent sounds and elapsed sounds of the BGM code (chord) at the sounding timing, so that the BGM code at that time is determined. The pitching sound generated at the same pitch allows the player to hear a melody accompanied by BGM. In addition, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering the ball and the number of entered balls, so that the player can enjoy various melodies played by the incoming sound at different times.

  On the other hand, when the value of the pointer 223g is determined to be 1 by the processing of S3512 (S3512: Yes), the value of the pointer 223g is changed from 0 to 1 by S2128 of the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 45). Since it is the process immediately after the count-up, that is, the process executed for the first time after a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined and a new data table is set accordingly, the start winning counter 223d Is set to 0 (S3521), and the start winning sound output processing ends. This allows the starting winning counter 223d to count the number of balls entering the first starting port 64 after the start of the fluctuation effect based on the determined detailed fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the sound output device 226 can output the ball entry sound corresponding to the ball that entered the first starting port 64 after the start of the fluctuation effect.

  In the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 45), the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) executed when an effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is performed is the same as that of the first embodiment. Similarly, the details are almost the same as the start winning sound output processing. In other words, the start button winning counter 223d used in the start button sound output processing is replaced with the frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound generated by replacing the winning sound with the operation sound is the frame button operation sound output processing. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, the same operation and effect as the winning sound output by the start winning sound output processing can be achieved in the operation sound.

  In particular, since the operation sound is generated in synchronism with the BGM beat, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the sound ramp control device 113 outputs a sound output from the sound output device 226 based on the effect determined based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, A description will be given of a case where the mode of lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227 and the mode of operation of the first accessory 87 (driving of the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e) are determined and controlled. did.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in the display control device 114, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the specified display content is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control. Notify the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 according to the display content notified from the display control device 114.

  Accordingly, in the first and second embodiments, the sound ramp control device 113 counts the period (T) of the BGM beat, whereas in the third embodiment, the display control is performed in the third embodiment. The BGM beat cycle (T) is counted by the device 114, and the display control device 114 notifies the sound ramp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and back beat.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223.

  The RAM 223 of the third embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9) in that a one-beat flag 223l and a back-beat flag 223m are provided instead of the timer counter 223h. . In the third embodiment, the timer counter 223h is unnecessary because the sound ramp control device 113 does not count the period (T) of the BGM beat.

  The one-beat flag 223l is a flag indicating the timing of a BGM beat. When it is on, it indicates the timing of a BGM beat, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not the timing of a BGM beat. The back beat flag 223m is a flag indicating the timing of the back beat of BGM. When it is on, it indicates the timing of the back beat of BGM, and when it is off, it is the timing of the back beat of BGM. Indicates no.

  Both the one-beat flag 223l and the back-beat flag 223m are set to the initial value “OFF” in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Is set. At this time, a beat command indicating the beat timing of the BGM is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio ramp control device 113 at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the beat command is output at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. A beat command indicating the beat timing is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113.

  The MPU 221 sets the one-beat flag 223l to ON when receiving a beat command indicating the timing of a BGM beat from the display control device 114. When a beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of BGM is received from the display control device 114, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON.

  The one-beat flag 223l is referred to in the sound editing / output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and when the beat flag 223l is on, it is determined that the timing of the BGM beat is the same as that in the first embodiment. The processing in S2133 is executed.

  By performing the processes of S2128 to S2133 at the timing of the BGM beat, reading of various control information from the data table is performed at the timing of the BGM beat, and according to the read various control information, at the timing of the BGM beat, The sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. For example, through the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction start and stop can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat. Further, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the lamp editing process (S1910) based on the various control information read out here by the first accessory editing drive process (S1910). The lighting / flashing of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

  Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be increased. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the start and stop of sound reproduction can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  The data table used by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is provided for each effect determined by the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with a command from the main control device 110 or the like. On the other hand, the data table used by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is provided one by one for all display contents notified from the display control device 114.

  The one-beat flag 223l is referred to in the start winning prize sound output process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output process. When the beat flag 223l is on, it is determined that the timing is the BGM beat timing. , The processing of S2156 to S2168 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Further, the back beat flag 223m is also referred to in the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing, and when the back beat flag 223m is on, the back beat timing of the BGM is used. If there is, the processes of S2170 to S2179 are executed as in the first embodiment.

  Thus, the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, when a pitching sound or an operation sound is generated, the pitch of the pitching sound or the operation sound is determined by using a constituent sound or an elapsed sound of a BGM chord (chord) at the sound generation timing. As a result, not only the pitching sound and the operation sound are generated in accordance with the beat and back beat of the BGM, but also the pitch is adjusted to the pitch of the BGM at that time. Therefore, the melody with BGM can be composed of the incoming sound and the operation sound, and the player can listen to the melody. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating the ball, the number of entered balls and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melody played by the incoming sound and the operation sound at each time.

  The one beat flag 223l and the back beat flag 223m are used in the sound editing / output processing (see FIGS. 56 and 57), including the start winning prize sound output processing (see FIGS. 58 and 59) and the frame button operation sound output processing. After the processing for referring to these flags is performed, all of them are set to off (S4002 and S4003 in FIG. 57).

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 according to the third embodiment differs from the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment in that a work RAM 233 is provided with a timer counter 233f and that the display control device 114 is stored in a display data table storage area 232a. The content specified in the displayed display data table is partially different.

  The timer counter 233f is a counter for counting the period of the BGM beat in the display control device 114. The MPU 231 uses the timer counter 233f to determine the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM being reproduced. In the display setting process (S2603), the MPU 231 determines whether or not it is the BGM change timing based on the command newly received from the audio lamp control device 113. A BGM reproduction start command including information on the type of the changed BGM is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 to instruct the audio ramp control device 113 to start reproduction of a new BGM, and the timer counter 233f is set to one. Initialization is performed (S3611 to S3614 in FIG. 51).

  In addition, the program ROM 232 stores the tempo of all the BGMs to be reproduced, and the MPU 231 reads out the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced from the program ROM 232 and calculates the beat cycle T therefrom ( S3613 in FIG. 51).

  Thereafter, the timer counter 233f is incremented by one in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds. However, when the value of the timer counter 233f matches the beat period T, “1” is set instead of adding “1”. Thereby, the cycle of the BGM beat is counted by the timer counter 233f.

  When the value of the timer counter 233f is T, the MPU 231 determines that the timing of the BGM is a beat, and transmits a beat command indicating the timing of the BGM to the audio ramp control device 113. The sound ramp control device 113 recognizes the timing of the BGM beat by receiving a beat command indicating the timing of the BGM beat. When the value of the timer counter 233f is T / 2, the MPU 231 determines that the timing of the BGM is a back beat, and sends a beat command indicating that the timing of the BGM is a back beat to the audio ramp control device 113. Send. The audio ramp control device 113 recognizes the timing of the back beat of the BGM beat by receiving a beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87 (the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the second (The driving of the single object rotation motor 87e). Thereby, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives an incoming sound to notify that there is an incoming ball to the first entrance 64 and an operation to the frame button 22 at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM. A control for generating an operation sound for notifying the user is performed. Therefore, the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated at the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM, so that the player can hear the incoming sound and the operation sound that match the rhythm of the BGM.

  Since the display control device 114 updates the value of the timer counter 223f every 20 milliseconds, the display control device 114 can only count the BGM beat cycle at intervals of 20 milliseconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the tempo of the BGM is determined such that the period of the beat of the BGM is a multiple of 20 milliseconds. That is, the tempo of the BGM is determined by the display control device 114 based on the update interval of the value of the timer counter 223f. For example, when the V interrupt processing is executed every 30 milliseconds, the value of the timer counter 223f is also updated every 30 milliseconds. Therefore, the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the cycle of the BGM beat is a multiple of 30 milliseconds.

  Next, details of the display data table stored in the display data table storage area 232a of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for fluctuation among the display data tables.

  The difference between the display data table in the third embodiment and the display data table in the first embodiment is that, in addition to the drawing contents, the display contents of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at some addresses in the future It is a point that stipulates. For example, when displaying the high-speed fluctuation in the fluctuation effect, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”, and when displaying a girl character image, the display content is specified as “girl character display”, and the light emitting effect is displayed. When displaying an image, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  The display contents are also included in the additional data table. That is, in the additional data table that defines the display of an image to be displayed in addition to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table, the display content is defined at some addresses.

  The display contents specified in the display data table and the additional data table are used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 223c in the display data table or the additional data table, the MPU 231 sends a display type command including information indicating the display content to the audio lamp control device 113. To send.

  When receiving the display type command from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command from the sound output device 226, and turns on and blinks the lamp display device 227. Then, control for operating the first accessory 87 is performed. Thereby, the sound can be easily output from the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227 can be turned on and blinked, or the first accessory 87 can be operated according to the display content.

  Here, in the display data table and the additional data table, a new image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is deleted, or the image is changed in accordance with the beat timing of the BGM. The drawing contents are specified, and the display contents are specified. Therefore, the execution of the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 also start in synchronization with the beat of the BGM. Then, as described above, in the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output from the sound output device 226 whose execution has been started, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the first character 87 Control the operation of. Therefore, the display of an image on the third symbol display device 81, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp control device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM. The player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of a variation pattern command process (S2713), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing.

  In the variation pattern command process in the third embodiment, after the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted by the process of S2831, the detailed variation pattern flag corresponding to the extracted detailed variation pattern is turned on. The detailed fluctuation pattern flags corresponding to the other detailed fluctuation patterns are set to OFF (S3601). Here, the detailed variation pattern flag is a flag provided for all the detailed variation patterns, and indicates that the variation effect is performed by the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the turned-on detailed variation pattern flag.

  Next, the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3602). Then, after the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833), the restart effect specified by the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3602 is performed. The time data representing the time is set in the time counter 233e (S3603). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the set command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the set display flag are all set to off (S2836). Then, the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835, the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3602 is updated. Then, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified.

  That is, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, first, the MPU 231 executes a restart effect (an effect in which the third symbol moves up and down) on the third symbol display device. Then, when the timing of the beat of the BGM comes, the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern corresponding to the detailed variation pattern flag set to ON by the processing of S3601 is started, and first, the high-speed variation of the third symbol is performed. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for executing the fluctuation effect according to the detailed fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the BGM. It looks as if it were warm. More specifically, the fake display is performed by using the fluctuation display data table for the time shorter than the original fluctuation time so that the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat. This is achieved by stipulating. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the original confirmed display timing comes, and the original fluctuation time is secured. This allows the player to perceive that the variable effect has been stopped along the BGM rhythm.

  Therefore, the variable effect is started to the player in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can see as if it were stopped and displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation effect can be enjoyed by putting the player on the rhythm of BGM.

  Next, details of the display determination process (S2603) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In the display determination process according to the third embodiment, when the new command flag is on and it is determined that the new command is determined in the previous command determination process (S2901: Yes), after the suspended image setting process (S2904). Or, in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new pending ball count command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the BGM change timing (S3611). . Whether or not this BGM change timing is determined based on a command received from the audio ramp control device 113. For example, based on the command, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when notifying the big hit and the notification of the big hit, the timing of starting or ending the reproduction of the big hit production BGM output at the time of the big hit production, and the like. Is determined, it is determined as the BGM change timing.

  If it is determined that it is the BGM change timing (S3611: Yes), a BGM reproduction start command including information on the BGM type after the change is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3612). . As a result, in the sound ramp control device 113, the reproduction of the BGM of the type included in the BGM reproduction start command is started and output from the audio output device 226.

  Next, the tempo of the BGM of the type at which the reproduction is started is read from the program ROM 232, the cycle T of the beat of the BGM is calculated, and stored in the work RAM 233 (S3613). Further, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S3614). By updating this timer counter 233f while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds and counting up to the BGM beat period T calculated in the process of S3613, the MPU 231 Using the counter 233f, the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced can be grasped.

  As a result of the processing in S2901, if it is determined that the new command flag is OFF (S2901: No), as a result of the processing in S3611, it is determined that it is not BGM change timing (S3611: No), or S3614 After the processing in (3), the flow shifts to the processing in S3615. In the processing of S3615, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S3615). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S3615: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat. It is set (S3616).

  The beat command set here is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started. By receiving the beat command, the sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the beat of BGM. Since the transmission of the beat command is performed at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process is preceded by a command determination process, and is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and there is a slight shift. Therefore, since the generation of the beat command is not always performed accurately at the interval of 20 milliseconds, if the generated beat command is directly transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, the beat of the BGM recognized by the sound ramp control device 113 is obtained. The intervals may be shifted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, so that the interval of the BGM beat grasped by the sound ramp control device 113 is accurately maintained. I can help you.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern flag has been set by the process of S3601 in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 50) (S3617). If there is a detailed variation pattern flag set (S3617: Yes), a detailed variation pattern setting process is executed (S3618).

  Here, the details of the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process (S3618) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The detailed variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation display data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern in the display data table buffer 233a and executing a variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern.

  In the detailed variation pattern setting process, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern for which the detailed variation pattern flag is set to ON is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3631). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S3632).

  Next, time data representing the time during which display is controlled by the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S3631 is set in the time counter 233e (S3633). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S3634), and the set command flag, the demonstration display flag, the set display flag, and all the detailed variation pattern flags are set to off (S3635). Then, the process returns to the display setting process.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S3634, the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S3631 is updated to the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The specified drawing contents are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 are specified. Therefore, the variation effect based on the detailed variation pattern can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation display data table set by the process of S3631.

  Here, when the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 does not immediately execute the variation effect according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but once. , Perform a restart effect. Then, at the timing of the BGM beat, the detailed fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, and the execution of the fluctuation effect according to the detailed fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is started. Specifically, the high speed fluctuation of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, which is a display data table for executing a fluctuation effect in accordance with a detailed fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is apparently changed at the timing of the BGM beat. Is displayed as if stopped. This allows the player to perceive that the variable effect has been stopped along the BGM rhythm. Therefore, the fluctuation effect is started to the beat of the BGM to the player, and it can be made to appear as if stopped and displayed, so that the player can enjoy the fluctuation effect on the rhythm of the BGM. it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After execution of the detailed variation pattern setting process (S3618) or when it is determined by the process of S3617 that the detailed variation pattern flag is not set (S3617: No), the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 next. (S3619). Thus, the counting of the period T of the BGM beat is started again by the timer counter 233f. Then, the flow shifts to the process of S2905.

  As a result of the processing in S3615, if the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the cycle T of the BGM beat (S3615: No), then, the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half (T / 2) of the cycle of the BGM beat. It is determined whether or not it is (S3620). When the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half (T / 2) of the period of the beat of the BGM (S3620: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. A beat command to be indicated is set (S3621).

  The beat command set here is also transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started, similarly to the beat command indicating the timing of the beat. The sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the back beat of the BGM by the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The reason why the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next is the timing of the beat of the BGM. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next, for the same reason. In other words, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, the interval between the beats and back beats of the BGM grasped by the audio ramp control device 113 can be accurately maintained. it can.

  After the process of S3621, or when it is determined by the process of S3620 that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half (T / 2) of the period of the BGM beat (S3620: No), the process proceeds to S3622. The processing shifts, and the timer counter 233f is updated by adding 1 to the value of the timer counter 233f (S3622). Then, the flow shifts to the process of S2905.

  In the process of S2905, the same pointer update process as that of the first embodiment is executed (S2905). Thereafter, from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update processing is developed (S3623). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3623 together with the previously expanded reserved image, and the display coordinate position is set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed on the assumption that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S3623, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the address indicated by the pointer 233c and the third symbol display device 81 from now on. If the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command for notifying the display content to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the sound output device 226 to output sound corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command, turns on / off the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87. Done.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table and the additional data table, the drawing content is defined so that an image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the beat of BGM, and Specifies the display contents. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the BGM beat, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat.

  As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the sound in accordance with the display content, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the BGM beat. As described above, the output of the sound according to the display contents and the start of the driving of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by the player.

  After the processing of S3623, the process shifts to the same processing of S2911 as in the first embodiment, and thereafter, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of a main process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  The main processing in the third embodiment differs from the main processing in the first embodiment in that a display command determination process (S3701) is performed after the command determination process (S1914). In the display command determination processing (S3701), processing according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed.

  Here, the display command determination processing (S3701) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a display command determination process executed by the sound lamp control device 113. The command received from the display control device 114 is temporarily stored in a display control command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223.

  In the display command determination processing, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the display control device 114 is read and analyzed from the display control command storage area, and whether the display type command is received from the display control device 110 is determined. It is determined whether or not it is (S3801). When it is determined that the display type command has been received (S3801: Yes), display contents (display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are extracted from the received display type command (S3802). Then, a data table corresponding to the display content is read out from the ROM 222 and set (S3803), the pointer 223g is initialized to 0 (S3804), and the display command determination processing ends.

  Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 reproduces sound according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 according to the data table set by the processing of S3803, and outputs the sound from the sound output device 226. In addition, according to the data table, control for turning on / off the lamp display device 227 is performed. Further, in order to operate the first accessory 87, the first accessory vertical movement motor 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87e are operated. Drive control is performed.

  Here, the display type command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, as described above. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 controls the reproduction of sound corresponding to the display content indicated by the display type command, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, the operation of the first accessory 87, and the BGM beat timing. You can start with

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the process of S3801 (S3801: No), then it is determined whether a BGM reproduction start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3808). . As a result, when it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has been received (S3808: Yes), the BGM reproduction start command of the type specified by the BGM reproduction start command is set to the sound output LSI 301 (S3809). As a result, reproduction of the designated BGM is started and output from the sound output device 226.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BGM to be reproduced is the BGM for time saving (S3810). If it is not the BGM for use (S3810: No), the time saving BGM reproduction flag 223c is set to off (S3812). As a result, while the BGM for time saving is reproduced as the BGM, the incoming sound for notifying of the incoming to the first entrance 64 is generated by the processing of S2134 and S2135 of the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 56). A start winning sound output process that is reproduced at the timing of the beat of the BGM for time reduction is executed. When the processing in S3811 or S3812 ends, the display command determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the BGM reproduction start command has not been received as a result of the process of S3808 (S3808: No), then it is determined whether a beat command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3813). If it is determined that a beat command has been received (S3813: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the beat command indicates the timing of a BGM beat (S3814).

  As a result, if it is a beat command indicating the timing of the BGM beat (S3814: Yes), the one-beat flag 223l is set to ON (S3815), and the display command determination process ends. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control while judging that it is a BGM beat timing based on the turned on one beat flag 223l.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3814, if the received beat command is not a beat command indicating the timing of a BGM beat (S3814: No), the beat command confirmed to be received by the processing of S3813 indicates the timing of the back beat of the BGM. Since it is a beat command, the back beat flag 223m is set to ON (S3816), and the display command determination processing ends. As a result, the MPU 221 performs control while judging that it is the timing of the back beat of BGM based on the turned on back beat flag 223m.

  As a result of the processing in S3813, when it is determined that the beat command has not been received (S3813: No), it is determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S3817). If no other command has been received (S3817: No), the display command determination processing ends, and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S3817: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S3818), the display command determination processing ends, and the process returns to the main processing.

  With reference to FIG. 55, details of the variable display processing (S1913) executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S1913).

  In the variation display process, first, similarly to the first embodiment, after performing the processes of S2101 to S2104, a display for notifying the display controller 114 of the detailed variation pattern determined in the process of S2104 is performed. A variation pattern command is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S3501). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3502).

  Here, the set display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process (S1902) executed subsequently in the main process (see FIG. 24). Is done.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command generated at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 are transmitted to the display control device 113 immediately. Instead, it temporarily stores the data in the RAM 223, and instead transmits a display variation start command to the display control device 113 to start a variation effect by starting a restart effect. By transmitting the fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command to the display control device 113 to start the high-speed fluctuation of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation effect is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM apparently. In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command and a stop type command are received from the main control device 110, The timing for display generated by the variation pattern command and the display stop type command immediately send to the display control unit 113. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, first, a restart effect is executed, and at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, a detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is generated. Based on the fluctuation effect.

  After the processing of S3502, the same processing of S2107 and S2108 as in the first embodiment is performed, and the variable display processing ends.

  Next, the sound editing / output processing (S1908) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are flowcharts showing the sound editing / output processing (S1908).

  In the sound editing / output processing according to the third embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4001). If the one-shot flag 223l is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S2134, while if the one-shot flag 223l is on (S4001: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced. The processing in S2128 to S2133, which is the same as in the first embodiment, is executed, and the flow shifts to processing in S2134. That is, at the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced, the control information associated with the address indicated by the pointer 223g of the set data table is read out while sequentially counting up the pointer 223g, and if there is sound reproduction start information, A reproduction start command including information on a sound to start reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301. If there is sound reproduction stop information, a reproduction stop command including information on a sound to stop reproduction is set in the sound output LSI 301.

  That is, the reading of various control information from the data table is performed at the timing of the BGM beat, and the audio output from the audio output device 226 and the lighting of the lamp display device 227 at the timing of the BGM beat in accordance with the read various control information. -The blinking and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled. For example, through the processing of S2130 to S2133, sound reproduction start and stop can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat. Further, the lamp editing process (S1909) of the main process (FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 and the lamp editing process (S1910) based on the various control information read out here by the first accessory editing drive process (S1910). The lighting / flashing of the display device 227 and the operation of the first accessory 87 are controlled.

  Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound output, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, the interest in the game by the player can be increased. For example, by the processing of S2130 to S2133, the start and stop of sound reproduction can be performed at the timing of the BGM beat, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  The processing of S2134 to S2137 and the processing of S2138 to S2141 shown in FIG. 57 are the same processing as in the first embodiment. Then, after the process of S2141 ends, or as a result of the process of S2140, when it is determined that there is end information of the effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 (S2140: No), in the third embodiment, The flow shifts to the process of S4002, where the one-beat flag 223l is set to off (S4002). Further, the back beat flag 223m is set to off (S4003), and the sound editing / output processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, details of the start winning sound output processing (S2135) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIGS. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the start winning prize sound output processing (S2135).

  The start winning sound output processing according to the third embodiment is different from the starting winning sound output processing according to the first embodiment in that the determination as to whether or not it is the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM being reproduced is different. This is the same as the start winning sound output processing in the first embodiment. Specifically, the process of S4101 is executed in place of the process of S2155 in the first embodiment, and it is determined whether or not the one-beat flag 223l is ON, thereby determining whether or not the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced is present. A determination is made (S4101). If the one-beat flag 223l is on (S4101: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat being reproduced, so that the same processes of S215 to S2168 as in the first embodiment are executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4101, if the one-beat flag 223l is off (S4101: No), the process of S4102 shown in FIG. 49 is executed instead of the process of S2169 of the first embodiment. That is, by determining whether or not the back beat flag 223m is ON, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being reproduced (S4102).

  Then, if the back beat flag 223m is on (S4102: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM being reproduced, so that the same processes of S2170 to S2179 as in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4102, if the back beat flag 223m is off (S4102: No), the start winning sound output process ends.

  In the startup winning sound output processing in the third embodiment, the processing in S2151 to S2154 is the same processing as in the first embodiment.

  Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same operation and effect as the start winning prize sound output processing in the first embodiment by executing the start winning prize sound output processing in the third embodiment.

  The details of the frame button operation sound output processing (S2137) in the third embodiment are almost the same as those of the start winning prize sound output processing in the third embodiment. The start button winning counter 223d is replaced with a frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound generated is replaced with the operation sound from the winning sound as the frame button operation sound output processing. Therefore, the MPU 221 can achieve the same operational effects as the frame button operation sound output processing in the first embodiment by executing the frame button operation sound output processing in the third embodiment.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the display control device 114 counts the period of the BGM beat being reproduced, detects the timing of the BGM beat and the back beat, and outputs the sound ramp. Notify the control device 113. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 controls so that the reproduction of the audio, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are performed at the timing of the beat or back beat of BGM. Thereby, the same operation and effect as those of the first embodiment can be obtained.

  That is, when a ball (starting winning) is detected in the first ball entrance 64, the incoming sound for notifying the player that there is an incoming ball is adjusted to the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. Output. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, an operation sound for notifying the player of the operation is output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat.

  Thus, the incoming sound and the operation sound are generated in accordance with the rhythm of BGM, so that a sound having a rhythmic sense is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, when a pitching sound or an operation sound is generated, the pitch of the pitching sound or the operation sound is determined by using a constituent sound or an elapsed sound of a BGM chord (chord) at the sound generation timing. As a result, not only the pitching sound and the operation sound are generated in synchronism with the beat of the BGM, but also the pitch is adjusted to the pitch of the BGM at that time. Therefore, the melody with BGM can be composed of the incoming sound and the operation sound, and the player can listen to the melody. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating the ball, the number of entered balls and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melody played by the incoming sound and the operation sound at each time.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down is performed on the third symbol display device 81 from the timing of the original change start to the timing of the BGM beat. (Symbol shaking period). Then, when the timing of the first BGM beat arrives from the original variation start timing, the reading of the data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern determined for the variation production is started at that timing, In the three-symbol display device 81, high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started.

  Here, a display pattern is set in advance so that the display of various effect images during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed in accordance with the beat of the BGM. Further, the output from the sound output device 226 of the sound in accordance with the display of the effect image and the lighting / flashing of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 are specified in the data table, and these are also set in accordance with the BGM beat. Done.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing of the BGM beat shortly before the original fixed display is performed, and it is also confirmed that the stopped symbol is displayed. The sound output device 226 produces a stop sound to be represented. Thereafter, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down (a symbol shaking period) until the original finalized display timing is reached, and the third symbol is finally displayed at the original finalized display timing.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect is originally started irrespective of the beat of the BGM and is definitely displayed, but in the present embodiment, the high-speed fluctuation is started according to the timing of the beat, and once, Perform stop display. A display in which the third symbol is vibrated up and down as a symbol swinging period from the initial variation start timing to the start of the high-speed variation and from the temporary stop display to the original final display timing. Do.

  Thus, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is started in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and the player can be shown as if a stop display was performed. Also, various effect images displayed during the fluctuation effect can be displayed in accordance with the beat of the BGM, and furthermore, output of sound in accordance with the fluctuation effect, lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and furthermore, The movement of the one accessory 87 can also be performed according to the beat of the BGM. Therefore, the player can give a sense that the fluctuating effect is also performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that a rhythmical game can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Can be.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the timing of changing the BGM, for example, the timing of starting the reproduction of the BGM output when the big hit is notified of the big hit, and the big hit effect Once the BGM is changed, for example, at the timing of starting or ending the playback of the big hit effect BGM output at the time, the BGM continues to be played regardless of the start and stop of the variable effect, and the fake start of the variable effect (high-speed The description has been given of the case where the start of the fluctuation) and the apparent stop display (the temporary stop of the third symbol) are executed at the timing of the BGM beat.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the reproduction of the BGM is started at the start of the variable effect, and the reproduction of the BGM is ended at the end of the variable effect. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the display control device 114 specifies the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the specified display content is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device. 113, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound output from the sound output device 226, the sound output from the sound output device 226, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the first role. It is common to the third embodiment in that the operation of the object 87 is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 counts the period (T) of the BGM beat, and the display control device 114 notifies the sound ramp control device 113 of the timing of the BGM beat and back beat. Common to the form.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the third embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the details of the display setting process (S2603) executed by the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2603).

  In the display setting process of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3611 to S14 and the processes of S3615 to S3622 executed in the display setting process of the third embodiment are not executed. After the pointer update processing (S2905) is executed, the processing of S4201 to S4210 is executed instead of the processing of S3624. In other processes in the fourth embodiment, the same processes as the display setting process in the third embodiment are executed.

  First, in the process of S4201, drawing of the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process (S2905) is performed from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are developed (S4201). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3623 together with the previously expanded reserved image, and the display coordinate position is set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed on the assumption that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with Null data, Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S4201, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the address indicated by the pointer 233c and the third symbol display device 81 from now on. If the content (see FIG. 49) is specified, a display type command for notifying the display content to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the sound output device 226 to output sound corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command, turns on / off the lamp display device 227, and operates the first accessory 87. Done.

  Here, when the display data table for fluctuation is set, the high-speed fluctuation display is specified as the display content at the first address (0001H), and the MPU 231 instructs the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with this. Then, a display type command indicating high-speed fluctuation display of a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table is transmitted. Upon receiving the display type command, the sound lamp control device 113 starts reproducing the BGM corresponding to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display type command. That is, the reproduction of the BGM is started at the same time as the start of the fluctuation effect.

  In the display data table for fluctuation, stop display is defined as display content at the last address corresponding to the end time of the fluctuation effect, and the MPU 231 instructs the sound lamp control device 113 to stop display according to the display content. Send the indicated display type command. Upon receiving the display type command, the sound lamp control device 113 emits a stop sound indicating that the stoppage of the fluctuation effect has been displayed, and stops the reproduction of the BGM.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation time is defined so that the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, the fluctuation effect ends at the timing of the BGM beat, and the stop sound of the fluctuation effect is also generated at the timing of the BGM beat. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation effect is stopped in synchronization with the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, the fluctuation effect can be ended rhythmically, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table define the drawing content so that the image is newly displayed, changed, or deleted at the timing of the BGM beat. The display contents are also specified. That is, the display content is defined in association with the address that is the timing of the BGM beat, and the display type command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat.

  As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, the reproduction of the sound in accordance with the display content, the lighting / flashing of the lamp display device 227, and the operation of the first accessory 87 are started at the timing of the BGM beat. As described above, the output of the sound according to the display contents and the start of the driving of the first accessory 87 are performed according to the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can enjoy the game rhythmically. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by the player.

  After the process of S4201, it is determined whether it is the BGM change timing or not (S4202). As the change timing of the BGM, for example, in addition to the start timing of the variable effect described above, the timing of starting the display indicating that the big hit has been started, the timing of starting the big hit effect, and the display indicating the end of the big hit effect are started. Timing. These timings are determined based on the display content specified in the set display data table or additional data table.

  As a result of the process of S4202, when it is determined that it is the timing of changing the BGM (S4202: Yes), the tempo of the BGM of the type to start the reproduction is read from the program ROM 232, and the cycle T of the beat of the BGM is calculated. Is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4203). Further, the timer counter 233f is initialized to 1 (S4204). The timer counter 233f is updated while counting up in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds, and counts up to the BGM beat cycle T calculated in the process of S4203. By using the counter 233f, the timing of the beat of the BGM being reproduced can be grasped.

  After the process of S4204, or as a result of the process of S4202, when it is determined that it is not the GM change timing (S4202: No), the value of the timer counter 233f is then equal to the period T of the BGM beat being reproduced. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4205). As a result, if the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to the period T of the beat of the BGM being reproduced (S4205: Yes), it is the timing of the BGM beat. It is set (S4206).

  The beat command set here is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started. By receiving the beat command, the sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the beat of BGM. Therefore, the sound of the incoming ball to inform the first incoming sound 64, the operation sound of notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated, and the like are output by the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing of the BGM beat. Can be pronounced.

  Since the transmission of the beat command is performed at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed. The display setting process executed in the V interrupt process is preceded by a command determination process, and is not necessarily executed at intervals of 20 milliseconds, and there is a slight shift. Therefore, since the generation of the beat command is not always performed accurately at the interval of 20 milliseconds, if the generated beat command is directly transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, the beat of the BGM recognized by the sound ramp control device 113 is obtained. The intervals may be shifted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission of the beat command is permitted at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, so that the interval of the BGM beat grasped by the sound ramp control device 113 is accurately maintained. I can help you.

  Next, the value of the timer counter 233f is set to 1 (S4607). Thus, the counting of the period T of the BGM beat is started again by the timer counter 233f. Then, the flow shifts to S2911.

  As a result of the processing in S4205, when the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to the cycle T of the BGM beat (S4205: No), then, the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half (T / 2) of the cycle of the BGM beat. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4208). When the value of the timer counter 233f is equal to half (T / 2) of the period of the beat of the BGM (S4208: Yes), it is the timing of the back beat of the BGM. A beat command to be indicated is set (S4209). Therefore, the sound of the incoming ball, the operation sound, and the like can be generated by the sound ramp control device 113 using not only the timing of the beat of the BGM but also the timing of the back beat.

  The beat command set here is also transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 at the next timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started, similarly to the beat command indicating the timing of the beat. The sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the timing of the back beat of the BGM by the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM. The reason why the beat command indicating the timing of the back beat of the BGM is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next is the timing of the beat of the BGM. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the execution of the V interrupt processing is started next, for the same reason. In other words, by permitting the transmission of the beat command at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, the interval between the beats and back beats of the BGM grasped by the audio ramp control device 113 can be accurately maintained. it can.

  After the processing of S4209 or by the processing of S4208, when it is determined that the value of the timer counter 233f is not equal to half (T / 2) of the beat cycle of the BGM (S4208: No), The timer counter 233f is updated by adding 1 to the value of 233f (S4210). Then, the flow shifts to S2911.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, if a ball (start winning prize) is detected in the first entrance 64 while the BGM for time reduction is being reproduced as BGM, the ball is not entered. The incoming sound that informs the player of the fact can be output in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. In addition, while the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed, an operation sound for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 has been performed is output according to the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. can do. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  In addition, when the pitching sound or the operation sound is generated, the pitch of the pitching sound or the operation sound is determined by using the constituent sounds or the elapsed sounds of the BGM chord (chord) at the sound generation timing. The melody accompanied by the BGM can be made to be heard by the player by the incoming sound or the operation sound generated at the pitch that matches the BGM code at the time. Moreover, the melody varies depending on the timing of the ball entry, the number of balls entered, and the timing of the operation of the frame button 22 and the number of operations. The melody can entertain the player.

  In particular, since the operation sound is generated in synchronism with the BGM beat, a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, the player can perform a game such as rhythmically operating the frame button 22 while riding on the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment can exhibit the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. .

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first to fourth embodiments, a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is a constituent sound of a chord is generated at a beat of a certain BGM, and then an elapsed sound of the same chord is generated at a timing of a back beat of the BGM. Elapsed time in the back beat when a pitching sound or operation sound with a pitch is pronounced and a pitching sound or operation sound with a pitch of a component sound of the same chord is generated at the next BGM beat timing A case where the pitch of the sound and the constituent sound at the next beat are defined in association with the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat by the elapsed sound playback pitch setting table 222c (see FIG. 6). explained.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in such a case, the pitch of the elapsed sound at the back beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat are determined by the key of the BGM being reproduced (the main tone of the entire BGM) and the current BGM. It is calculated by calculation from the BGM code and the pitch of the first beat.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted. Needless to say, the invention realized in the fifth embodiment instead of the first embodiment is also applicable to the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth embodiments.

  FIGS. 61 and 62 illustrate the details of the start winning prize sound output process (S2122) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 are flowcharts showing the startup winning sound output processing (S2122).

  The start winning prize sound output process in the fifth embodiment is different from the start winning prize sound output process in the first embodiment in a case where the elapsed sound is output as a prize sound at the timing of the BGM back beat (S2172: Yes). The point that the process of S4402 (see FIG. 62) is executed instead of the process of S2174 (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and the case where the winning sound is output at the timing of the BGM beat, If the elapsed sound is generated (S2160: Yes), the process of S4401 (see FIG. 61) is executed instead of the process of S2164 (see FIG. 29). The other processes (S2151 to S2163, S2165 to S2173, S2175 to 2179) executed in the start winning prize sound output process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S4402 (FIG. 62), the pitch of the winning prize sound reproduced at the previous beat read out from the pitch information memory 223k by the immediately preceding process of S2173, the key of the BGM being reproduced, From the current BGM chord, the pitch of the winning prize sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated (S4402).

  For example, in the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the key note (“C” in this example) of the key matches the current chord (“C” in this example) and the previous beat. In the case where the pitch of the winning tone reproduced in step (1) matches the root tone of the current chord (completely in the first degree) (“do” in the above example), the pitch (elapsed sound) of the winning tone pronounced on the back beat , A pitch two times higher than the root sound of the chord (“レ” in the above example) is calculated.

  In the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the key note (“C” in this example) of the key matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and is reproduced at the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning prize sound is three times higher than the root chord of the current chord ("mi" in the above example), the pitch of the prize prize sound (elapsed sound) pronounced on the back beat is determined by the root of the chord. From the sound, a pitch of a perfect fourth ("F" in the above example) is calculated.

  In the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the key tone of the key (“C” in this example), and In the case where the pitch of the winning sound reproduced in step (a) is equal to the root note of the current chord (perfect first degree) ("F" in the above example), the pitch (elapsed sound) of the winning sound pronounced on the back beat , The pitch which is twice as long as the root tone of the chord (“S” in the above example) is calculated.

  Further, in the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the current chord is four degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the key tone of the key (“C” in this example), and If the pitch of the prize sound reproduced at the beat of the third chord is three times higher than the root note of the current chord ("La" in the above example), the pitch (elapsed sound) of the prize sound pronounced at the back beat , A pitch higher by four times from the root sound of the chord (“S” in the above example).

  Similarly to the processing of S4402 (FIG. 62), the processing of S4401 (FIG. 61) reads the pitch of the winning prize reproduced at the previous beat and read from the pitch information memory 223k by the processing of S2163 executed immediately before. Then, from the key of the BGM being reproduced and the current BGM code, the pitch of the winning prize sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code is calculated (S4401).

  For example, in the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the key note (“C” in this example) of the key matches the current chord (“C” in this example) and the previous beat. If the pitch of the prize sound reproduced in step (1) matches the root note of the current chord (perfect first degree) (“do” in the above example), the pitch of the prize sound pronounced at the current beat (component sound) , A pitch three degrees higher than the root sound of the chord (“mi” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a winning prize tone having a pitch of the root chord of the current chord is produced at the previous beat, and a winning prize tone having a pitch twice as long as the root chord of the current chord is produced at the immediately preceding beat. At the current beat, a winning sound with a pitch three times higher than the root sound of the current chord is pronounced (in the above example, the winning sounds are pronounced in the order of "do," "re," and "mi").

  In the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the key tone (“C” in this example) of the key matches the current chord (“C” in this example), and is reproduced at the previous beat. If the pitch of the winning prize sound is three times higher than the root chord of the current chord ("mi" in the above example), the pitch of the prize prize sound (constituent tone) pronounced at the current beat is set as the pitch of the chord. From the root sound, a pitch of a perfect fifth (“S” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a prize tone with a pitch three degrees higher than the root chord of the current chord is pronounced on the previous beat, and a prize tone with a pitch exactly four degrees higher than the root chord of the current chord on the immediately preceding back beat. It is pronounced, and a prize tone with a pitch that is completely five degrees higher than the root chord of the current chord at the current beat is pronounced (in the above example, the prize tone is pronounced in the order of "mi" "fa" "so") ).

  In the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the current chord is 4 degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the key tone of the key (“C” in this example), and If the pitch of the prize sound reproduced in step 1 matches the root note of the current chord (complete 1 degree) ("F" in the above example), the pitch of the prize sound pronounced at the current beat (component sound) Then, a pitch three degrees higher than the root tone of the chord (“La” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a prize tone having the pitch of the root chord of the current chord is produced at the previous beat, and a prize tone having a pitch two times higher than the root chord of the current chord is produced at the immediately preceding beat. At the current beat, a winning prize tone having a pitch three degrees higher than the root tone of the current chord is pronounced (in the above example, the winning prize tone is pronounced in the order of “fa”, “so”, and “la”).

  Further, in the key of the BGM being reproduced (for example, C Major), the current chord is four degrees higher (“F” in this example) than the key tone of the key (“C” in this example), and If the pitch of the prize sound reproduced at the beat of the current chord is three times higher than the root tone of the current chord ("La" in the above example), the pitch of the prize sound pronounced at the current beat (component sound) Then, a pitch that is completely five degrees higher than the root note of the chord (“C” in the above example) is calculated. In other words, in this case, a prize tone having a pitch three times higher than the root tone of the current chord is produced at the previous beat, and a prize tone having a pitch four times higher than the root tone of the current chord is produced at the immediately preceding beat. It is pronounced, and at the current beat, a prize tone with a pitch that is completely five degrees higher than the root chord of the current chord is pronounced (in the above example, the prize tones are pronounced in the order of "la", "shi", "do") ).

  In this manner, the pitch of the winning prize sound having the elapsed sound of the chord is calculated from the pitch of the winning prize sound reproduced at the previous beat, the key of the BGM being reproduced, and the current BGM code. The only thing that can be calculated is that the scale (scale) determined according to the key set for the BGM simply changes the pitch of the tonic according to the key, and the pitch (note of the sound) constituting the scale is calculated. Height relationship) is always constant.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, after a pitching sound or an operation sound whose pitch is a constituent sound of a chord is generated at a beat of a certain BGM, the same chord is generated at the timing of the back beat of the subsequent BGM. When a pitching sound or an operation sound with a pitch of the elapsed sound of the sound is generated, and a pitching sound or an operation sound with the pitch of the component sound of the same chord is generated at the timing of the next BGM beat, Since the pitch of the elapsed sound at the back beat and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat are calculated from the key of the BGM being played, the current BGM code, and the pitch of the first beat, The pitch setting table 222c at the time of elapsed sound reproduction provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments can be omitted. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat, the elapsed sound at the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat are set for each possible chord in the BGM. Need not be stored in association with each other, so that an increase in the storage capacity required for the program ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  Note that also in the fifth embodiment, in the sound editing / output processing (see FIG. 27), a frame button operation sound output process (S2137) executed when an effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is being performed. Are substantially the same as the start winning sound output processing (see FIGS. 61 and 62). Specifically, the start winning prize counter 223d used in the start prize sound output processing is replaced with a frame button operation number counter 223f, and the sound generated by replacing the winning sound with the operation sound is the frame button operation sound output processing. Become. By executing the frame button operation sound output processing, the same operation and effect as the winning sound output by the start winning sound output processing can be achieved in the operation sound. That is, for each chord that can be taken by the BGM, it is necessary to store the pitch of the constituent sound at the first beat, the elapsed sound at the back beat, and the pitch of the constituent sound at the next beat in association with each other. Therefore, an increase in storage capacity required for the program ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment can exhibit the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the corresponding embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. .

  The "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims and the following gaming machines, and the "variable display" described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. And the "dynamic display of identification information" described in each of the following gaming machines.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment, and the like. The embodiment may be modified to be configured. The numerical values given in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can be naturally used.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, when a ball wins in the first opening 64 while the BGM for time saving is played as BGM, the winning is stocked and a winning sound for notifying the winning is generated. Although the case where the sound of the time saving BGM is pronounced at the beat or back beat timing has been described, the generation of the winning sound at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat is not necessarily performed while the beat of the time saving BGM is reproduced. However, the prize sound may be generated at a timing such as a beat or back beat of the BGM for an arbitrary BGM. As a result, the winning sound is generated in synchronism with the BGM beat or the like, so that a rhythmic sound is output. Therefore, since the player can play the game rhythmically on the rhythm of the BGM, the player's feeling for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, interest in the game can be increased.

  In addition, when a ball wins in the special winning opening (large opening) 65a while the jackpot effect is being performed, the winning is stocked, and a winning sound for notifying the winning is generated by the BGM for the jackpot effect. The sound may be generated at the timing of the beat or back beat. Thereby, the joy that a ball wins in the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot production period and many prize balls are obtained is further enhanced by the winning sound pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, and the player is I can be more satisfied. By changing the pitch of the winning sound in the manner described in each of the above embodiments, a melody in accordance with the chord progression of the BGM for the jackpot effect can be played by the winning sound. Therefore, the melody can further enhance the satisfaction of the player.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the ball is continuously entered into the first entrance 64, or when the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously performed, the entry that is stocked at the timing of the back beat of the BGM is performed. The number of balls or the number of operations is 2 or more, the incoming sound or operation sound is generated at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, and the BGM code at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the timing of the immediately following BGM beat The case where the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the code is generated on condition that the code of the BGM in the above is matched has been described. Then, the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord emitted at the timing of the back beat of the BGM is input to the pitch of the constituent sound of the chord emitted at the timing of the immediately preceding BGM beat. The melody played by the incoming sound or the operation sound is interposed between the ball sound or the operation sound and the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the component sound of the chord generated at the timing of the BGM immediately after. The case where the player gives an impression that follows the BGM code has been described. On the other hand, if the ball is continuously entered into the first entrance 64 or if the operation of the frame button 22 is continued, the number of entered balls at the timing of the back beat of the BGM Or, if the number of operations is two or more, and a pitching sound or operation sound is generated at the timing of the immediately preceding beat, the BGM code at the timing of the back beat of the BGM and the BGM at the timing of the immediately following BGM beat Irrespective of whether or not the chord matches, the incoming sound or the operation sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound may be generated at the timing of the back beat of the BGM. In this case, the pitch of the incoming ball sound or the operation sound generated at the timing of the immediately following BGM beat is determined from the pitch of the preceding beat (the previous beat) from the constituent sounds of the BGM chord at that timing. And the pitch at the timing of the back beat (elapsed sound of the chord at that time), the pitch along the scale set according to the key of the BGM is selected. Good. By this, the melody without the uncomfortable feeling along the chord progression of the BGM is selected even if the chord change sound is selected at the timing of the immediately following beat as the pitching sound of the incoming sound or the operation sound and the chord is changed at the timing of the immediately following beat. , Can be played by incoming sound or operation sound.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the ball is continuously entered into the first entrance hole 64 or when the operation of the frame button 22 is continued, not only the timing of the BGM beat but also the BGM The case where the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated using the timing of the back beat has been described. On the other hand, the incoming sound and the operation sound may be generated not only at the beat and back beat of BGM but also at a timing of 1/4 of the beat of BGM. Thereby, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the incoming sound and the operation sound, so that the player can be more enjoyed by the incoming sound and the operation sound.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case has been described in which a prize-winning sound immediate reproduction effect is prepared for the sound of the incoming ball sound when the BGM for time reduction is being reproduced. In other words, in the variable effect, the winning sound is not output at the timing of the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, but is entered into the first entrance 64 in the variable effect. A case has been described in which an effect is provided in which, when there is a ball, a ball pitch sound is output at a predetermined pitch without waiting for the beat or back beat of the BGM for time reduction. As a notice effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high, a prize sound shift consecutive output may be prepared in addition to or instead of the prize sound immediate play effect. That is, when the ball enters the first entrance hole 64, the incoming sound is generated with a slight shift from the beat or back beat timing of the time saving BGM, for example, shifted by 1/10 of the beat cycle. May be prepared. It may shift to a special gaming state called a big hit by causing the player to feel uncomfortable because the incoming sound is emitted at a timing shifted from the beat or back beat of the time saving BGM, You can have a strong sense of expectation.

  Further, for each of the above embodiments, an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound shift effect may be prepared for the operation sound. That is, when the operation button 22 is operated while the effect requiring the operation button 22 is performed, the operation sound is not generated at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat, but the operation button 22 is operated. An effect may be provided in which an operation sound is immediately sounded when the operation is performed. Alternatively, when the operation button 22 is operated while the effect requiring the operation button 22 is being performed, the operation sound is slightly shifted from the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, for example, 1/100 of the beat cycle. An effect for generating the operation sound may be provided by shifting the operation sound by ten. Although the player who operates the frame button 22 thinks that the operation sound is generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, the operation sound is immediately generated when the frame button 22 is operated. If the operation sound is generated at a different timing from the beat or back beat of the BGM, it is possible to give a strong sense of expectation that the game will shift to a special gaming state called a jackpot. 22 can be performed while having more fun.

  In addition, the above-described prize sound immediate reproduction effect, an effect in which the prize sound is produced by shifting from the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM for time saving, or the above-described operation sound immediate reproduction effect and operation sound shift effect are performed by a plurality of variations. It may be executed as one mode of a so-called continuous notice effect that is continuously executed over the effect. For example, when the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of a certain start winning prize indicates a jackpot, the above-mentioned prize sound instant reproduction effect is performed for all the variable effects held at that time. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the winning sound is shifted from the beat or back beat timing of the BGM for time reduction, or an operation sound immediate reproduction effect or an operation sound shift effect may be executed. Thereby, when there is a ball in the first entrance 64 or an operation of the frame button 22 over a plurality of fluctuation effects, without waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM for time reduction. In addition, it is possible to output a pitching sound or an operation sound at a predetermined pitch, or to generate a winning sound or an operation sound with a shift from the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM for time reduction. More sounds and operation sounds can be heard by the player, and the player can recognize a large number of game variations.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning sound and the operation sound generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM are stored, and when a big hit occurs, the stored winning sound or the operation sound is reproduced during the big hit effect. You may make it. This makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of superiority to the jackpot while listening to the reproduced melody due to the winning sound or the operation sound. When the player operates the frame button 22 after the end of the game, a QR code (registered trademark) including the stored winning sound and operation sound information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player The QR code may be photographed with a camera-equipped mobile phone and registered in a predetermined server. When a player plays a game with a pachinko machine of the same model, the password obtained from the predetermined server is input to the pachinko machine, so that a prize sound or an operation sound registered in the server is generated. You may make it possible to reproduce when it is done. Thereby, by listening to the melody by the winning sound or the operation sound reproduced in the past, it is possible to enhance the superiority of the player with respect to the jackpot. In each of the above embodiments, the winning sound or the operation sound is generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, or the pitch of the winning sound or the operation sound to be generated is determined according to the BGM code, or The function of determining the pitch of the winning sound or the operation sound using the elapsed sound of the code may be executed only when the password acquired from the predetermined server is input to the pachinko machine. . As a result, such a function can be provided only to a specific player, so that the attraction of the player can be enhanced by giving a special effect to the effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display pending ball number command to the display control device 114 without delay when the value of the retained ball number counter 223a is updated. In the sound ramp control device 113, the updated information of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is stocked, and the updated value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is displayed and controlled at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. A display reserved ball count command for notifying the device 114 may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the updated reserved ball count in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat. That is, the addition and disappearance of the number of reserved balls is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  In the case where the incoming sound is generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, at least while the incoming sound is generated at such timing, the incoming sound is generated at the timing when the incoming sound is generated. A display reserved ball number command indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the updated reserved ball count is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 together with the sound of the incoming ball sound, so that a more rhythmic game can be played to the player. Can be done.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the display lamp control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display lamp control device 114 indicates the display reserved ball number command without delay. A case has been described in which the number of reserved balls for the number of retained balls is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, after waiting for the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM being reproduced managed by the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command is changed to the third symbol. It may be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the display device 81. Thereby, the addition / deletion of the reserved ball number symbol is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM, so that the player can play a rhythmic game.

  In the second and fourth embodiments, the case where the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is set in accordance with the cycle of the BGM beat and the fluctuation effect is ended at the timing of the BGM beat has been described. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is set irrespective of the cycle of the BGM beat, and the fluctuation effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the BGM beat immediately before the end of the fluctuation effect. Thereafter, a display in which the third symbol swings up and down may be performed until the original stop display timing comes. Thereby, the player can be shown at the timing of the beat of the BGM that the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 has been completed, and adjust the impression that the variable effect has been performed in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM to the player. be able to. In this case, the stop sound of the third symbol is also generated at the timing of the BGM beat immediately before the end of the variable effect, when the variable effect is apparently stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also good. Thereby, it is possible to give a stronger impression to the player that the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 has ended at the timing of the BGM beat.

  In the above-described first and third embodiments, the case where the BGM is started to be reproduced from the beginning when the BGM change timing comes is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach BGM is reproduced and the BGM for the reach is reproduced, the BGM for the time reduction is muted and the reproduction is continued in the mute state. , The output of the BGM for time saving may be restarted. In this case, the BGM for time saving is continued to be reproduced while the BGM for reach is being reproduced. Therefore, the timer counter 223h for counting the beat timing of the BGM is counted even when the BGM for time reduction is muted. You need to keep doing it. This makes it possible to accurately determine the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM for time reduction even if the BGM for reach is reproduced during the reproduction of the BGM for time reduction. In addition, when a reach occurs during the playback of the BGM for time saving, and when the BGM for the reach is played, the playback of the BGM for the time saving is temporarily stopped. Alternatively, the pause of the BGM for time reduction may be released, and the reproduction may be resumed from the paused position. In this case, the timer counter 223h that counts the timing of the beats of the BGM needs to be maintained while the BGM for time reduction is temporarily stopped. This makes it possible to accurately determine the timing of the beat and back beat of the BGM for time reduction even if the BGM for reach is reproduced during the reproduction of the BGM for time reduction.

  In the first and third embodiments, when BGM reproduction is started after the end of the big hit, the BGM reproduction may be started together with the start of the variable effect. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect, or the time during which the fluctuation effect provided when each fluctuation effect is performed continuously, is set to be a multiple of the period of the BGM beat. May be set. Thus, the fluctuation effect is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM and ends at least until the number of suspensions of the fluctuation effect becomes 0, so that a rhythmic game matched to the rhythm of the BGM can be provided to the player.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the gaming machine 13 has one first entrance port 64 in which a jackpot lottery is started when the ball enters, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrance ports from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 313 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which of the first entrances is the fluctuation effect held by the first entrance. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the number of retained balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by one, and the first entrance is obtained. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, one of the first entrances is provided with a blade member that performs an enlargement / reduction operation (or opening / closing operation), and the blade member is in an expanded state (or opened). State), the ball may easily enter, and when the blade member is in the contracted state (or closed state), the ball may be difficult to enter (or cannot enter). . At this time, at one first entrance, the blade member may be configured to be more likely to be in the expanded state when the gaming state is in the probable state or the time saving state than when the ventilation state is in the normal state. On the other hand, the other first entrance may have no blade member and may be in a state where a ball can easily enter. In addition, when a jackpot is performed as a result of a jackpot that is performed in accordance with the entry into one of the first entrances, the jackpot is determined as a result of a jackpot that is performed in accordance with the entry into another first entrance. It may be configured such that a type of jackpot (for example, a 15R certain-variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is more easily selected than in the case where the player wins. When the pachinko machine has such a configuration, when the game state is the normal state, the ball is thrown into the other first entrance and the ball is given to the player so that the jackpot lottery is frequently performed. Fired, when the gaming state is in the positive change state or the normal state, the wing member is allowed to enter the ball into one first entrance which is likely to be in the expanded state, so that a type of jackpot advantageous to the player is obtained. The ball can be fired by the player. Therefore, a variation can be given to the way the game is played by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the fluctuation effect that is suspended corresponding to the entrance to one first entrance is the entrance to the other first entrance. May be executed in preference to the fluctuating effect that is suspended in response to the request. In particular, in the case of a jackpot as a result of a jackpot that is performed in accordance with the entry into one first entrance, a jackpot of a type (for example, a 15R certain variation jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is easily selected. In the case of being configured, by giving priority to the fluctuating effect that is held in response to the ball entering the first first entrance, a jackpot of an advantageous type is provided to the player. It can be easily provided. Therefore, the player's expectation can be increased.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, and when there is an entrance to all the first entrances, the incoming sound may be emitted. At this time, regardless of which first entrance opening the entry ball has, if there is an entry ball, the entry sound may be emitted at the timing of the BGM beat or back beat every time the entry ball is entered. Since the incoming sound is generated at the timing of many BGM beats or back beats, the player can hear a melody that does not delay. On the other hand, for each first entrance, the timing of sounding the incoming sound when there is an incoming ball may be controlled. That is, in this case, if a plurality of first entrances are entered at substantially the same time, the incoming sound for each first entrance is sounded at the same BGM beat or backbeat timing. Then, at this time, the pitch of each incoming sound may be determined so as to produce a chord that matches the BGM code at that time. As a result, the sound of the music can be tasted to the player, so that a more enjoyable game can be provided.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the incoming sound may be emitted only when a ball enters the one first entrance. If this one first entrance is configured such that, for example, a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (for example, a 15R certain-variable jackpot) is easily selected, every time a ball entry sound is generated. In addition, the player can easily know that there is a ball in one of the first entrances where a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player is likely to be selected, and the expectation for the game can be increased. . Further, since the incoming sound is generated at the timing of the beat or back beat of the BGM, the sense of expectation can be increased in accordance with the incoming sound that is generated according to the rhythm of the BGM, and the player can play the game rhythmically. You can enjoy. In particular, in the present embodiment, the pitching sound is generated when the gaming state is in the time saving state, but the state in which one first entrance is easier to enter in the time saving state than in the normal state. If so, the player is in a state where he / she strongly wants to know whether or not there is a ball in the one first ball entrance when he is in the time saving state. In such a situation, while the time saving BGM is being played, the ball-in sound is produced only when the ball is entered at the first entrance of the one, so that the player can perform the It can be known that there is a ball in the first ball entrance by the pitching sound generated at the pitch corresponding to the code of the time saving BGM in accordance with the rhythm of the time saving BGM. Therefore, the player can increase expectations for the game while adjusting to the rhythm of the BGM. Also, in this case, if the fluctuating effect held in response to the ball entry into one first entrance is executed with priority, the ball entry into one first entrance is performed. Since the corresponding fluctuating effect is rapidly digested, the number of reserved balls becomes the maximum number of reserved balls, and the ball entering one first entrance is rarely invalidated without being retained. In the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, it sounds that there is a ball and emits a pitching sound. The incoming sound is not pronounced for the incoming ball. On the other hand, by making the incoming sound sound when the ball enters the first entrance where the fluctuating effect is preferentially executed, the fluctuating effect that has been kept is continued to be digested. Is easy to be held in the first entrance, so that a large number of incoming sounds can be produced for entering the first entrance. Therefore, the pitching sound can be continuously generated, and the player can be entertained. Conversely, the variable effect for entering the ball into the other first entrance is kept suspended until all the variable effects for entering the ball into the first entrance are executed. The fluctuating effect held for the mouth immediately reaches the maximum number of held balls, and the situation where the number of held balls does not decrease from that point occurs. Therefore, even if the incoming sound for the other first entrance is pronounced, there is an incoming ball in the other first entrance as long as the variation effect for the maximum number of retained balls is kept pending. However, since the incoming sound is not pronounced, the melody of the incoming sound gives the player an impression that the sound is interrupted. On the other hand, if a sound is generated only when a ball enters one first entrance, such a situation can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, it is determined that a pitching sound has been made and a pitching sound is generated. That is, no incoming sound is generated for the incoming ball to the first incoming port 64 that has not been held. On the other hand, when main controller 110 detects a ball entering first ball entrance 64, it determines that there is a ball entering first ball entrance 64 regardless of whether or not the ball has been suspended. The command to be notified may be transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113, and the sound ramp control device 113 may receive the command, temporarily stock the incoming ball, and emit the incoming sound. As a result, although the incoming sound is pronounced even for the incoming ball for which the incoming sound was not suspended, the incoming sound is emitted for a larger number of incoming balls, so that a more complicated rhythm is produced. And melody can be played by the incoming sound that is pronounced according to the BGM. Therefore, the player can be more enjoyed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the incoming sound or the operation sound is generated at a pitch that matches the BGM code in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat or back beat is described. Irrespective of the timing of the beat and back beat, the timing of detecting that the first ball entry port 64 has been hit or the operation of the frame button 22 has been detected is not delayed and matches the BGM code at that time. A pitching sound or an operation sound may be generated at the pitch. As a result, a melody with BGM can be composed of the incoming sound and the operation sound, and the player can listen to the melody. Moreover, the melody differs depending on the timing of entering and operating the ball, the number of entered balls and the number of operations. Therefore, the player can be entertained by various melody played by the incoming sound and the operation sound at each time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the frame rate (frame update cycle) and the BGM tempo (beat cycle) in the third symbol display device 81 are not considered. However, for example, in the above-described embodiment, the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81 is 20 milliseconds, whereas if the BGM tempo is 160 BPM, the beat cycle is 375 milliseconds. In the third symbol display device 81, a maximum of 15 millisecond shift occurs between the frame update timing and the BGM beat timing. In general, a difference between an image and a sound is not a problem as long as it is smaller than a frame update cycle. However, there may be a case where an image is desired to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in exactly the timing of the beat of the BGM. In this case, for example, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the update timing of the frame in the third symbol display device 81, displays a predetermined effect image on the third symbol display device 81 at a certain beat timing, and adjusts it accordingly. When a sound is produced by sound, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the update timing of the frame that comes immediately after the beat, and the sound output LSI 301 responds to the display of the effect image. You may be made to instruct the pronunciation of the sound. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display a predetermined effect image and output a sound corresponding to the display at substantially the beat timing, although the timing slightly deviates from the original beat timing of the BGM. Note that the monitoring of the frame update timing in the third symbol display device 81 in the audio lamp control device 113 is performed, for example, by the audio lamp control device 113 instructing the display control device 114 to display the third symbol display immediately after the power is turned on. After instructing the start of driving of the device 81, the display control device 114 updates the frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at intervals of 20 milliseconds based on the instruction, while the sound lamp control device 113 It may be performed by always counting 20 milliseconds from the instruction. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 may receive the V interrupt signal from the display control device 114, and may monitor the update timing of the frame in the third symbol display device 81 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  Alternatively, the sound output LSI 301 may be instructed to reproduce the BGM instead of the tempo of the BGM so that the cycle of the BGM beat is a multiple of the frame update cycle in the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the tempo of BGM is 160 BPM, the output of the BPM is instructed to the sound output LSI 301 so that the beat cycle becomes 380 milliseconds and the tempo of BGM becomes 157.9 BPM. You may. This makes it possible to always match the update timing of the frame in the third symbol display device 81 with the timing of the beat of the BGM, so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 exactly in accordance with the timing of the BGM beat. Can be displayed. If the tempo of the BGM is determined so that the cycle of the beat of the BGM is the closest to the cycle of the original beat of the BGM among the multiples of the cycle of updating the frame in the third symbol display device 81, the BGM Since the tempo does not change much, the BGM can be heard by the player without any discomfort.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the initial values are stored in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 during the startup processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. The case of setting (S1810 in FIG. 23) and initialization has been described. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the audio lamp control device 113 always starts operating from the initial state when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and turned on again. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 controls the game state of the pachinko machine 10 that has been backed up by the main control device 110 (normal state, probable change state, time saving state, etc.) and the like. , The number of retained balls is notified to the audio ramp control device 113 by a command, and the audio ramp control device 113 sets values in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223 in accordance with the command received from the main control device 110. You may do so. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 performs sound output and lamp output reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. On the other hand, it is possible to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display an image reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110. Therefore, for example, when a momentary power failure occurs, the sound output, the lamp output, and the image display on the third symbol display device 81 are performed from the state immediately before the power failure, so that the player can play the game with ease. Can be continued.

  In the above embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , "Fluctuation start-up", "Fast variation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", prepare a display data table for each element, according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may make it. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Therefore, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image at which the drawing processing is completed (in each of the above embodiments, every 20 milliseconds) However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image developed first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, The buffer may be alternately selected, and the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. Frame buffer to be replaced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display data table defines the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at the time corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since one frame image is displayed every time, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and reduces the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223a by 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, in the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 that is subtracted according to the setting of the fluctuation pattern command by the fluctuation start process (S1207) is calculated. It is also possible to set a reserved ball count command so that main controller 110 transmits to voice ramp control device 113, and transmit the reserved ball count command from main control device 110 to voice ramp control device 113. Good. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls retained in the main control device 110.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to perform display. A command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Also, an audio lamp control device is connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and a command for starting the operation of the accessory, and a command for starting the operation of the accessory are provided by the sound lamp. You may comprise so that it may transmit to a control apparatus. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on a command directly received from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, the display control device A command for instructing output of each sound, lighting / flashing of a lamp, and operation start of a movable accessory may be transmitted. At this time, the timing of the BGM beats and back beats is managed by the display control device, and the output of each sound and the lamps are sent from the display control device to the sound lamp control device at the timing of the BGM beats and back beats. A command for instructing lighting / flashing of the character and starting operation of the movable accessory may be transmitted.

  Further, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of components can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Also, instead of the display type command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a display type flag is generated, and based on the display type flag, audio output, lamp lighting / flashing, The operation of the first accessory 87 may be controlled.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is four. However, the number is not limited to three, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example. In the slot machine, for example, the change of the symbol after the operation lever is operated is started at the timing of the beat of the BGM, and the sound is generated in accordance with the start of the change, so that the rhythm of the BGM is generated. Can be provided to the player. Also, a beep button for setting a bet number from among coins stored in advance instead of inserting a coin or a set sound when a bet number is set instead of inserting a coin. Is generated at the timing of the beat of the BGM, thereby providing the player with a game that matches the rhythm of the BGM.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, at least a period during which a game is played by the player in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player Output means for outputting music during the output, determination means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and an effect of executing an effect in accordance with the timing of the music beat determined by the determination means A gaming machine A1 comprising: an execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Here, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. Then, the effect is executed by the effect executing means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. Thereby, the effect is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine A1 includes setting means for setting a sound of a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an event when the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game has occurred, and the effect execution means is set by the setting means. A gaming machine A2, which is sounding means for sounding the notification sound in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. In other words, when an event occurs due to the progress of the game, the setting unit sets the sounding of a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is emitted by the sound generator in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determiner. That is, the notification sound is generated at the same time as the beat of the music output during at least the period during which the game is being played by the player in order to notify the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game. Accordingly, the notification sound is generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, and has an effect of increasing interest in the game.

  The game machine A2 has at least a main control unit for controlling a game, the output unit, the determination unit, and the sound generation unit, and controls a sound output based on a command from the main control unit. Control means, and the sound control means includes acquisition means for acquiring a beat cycle of the music output by the output means, and the determination means starts outputting the music by the output means. A timing of a beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on a lapse of time from the end and a cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. Machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the output of the sound is controlled by the sound control means based on a command from the main control means. The sound control means has at least output means, determination means, and sound generation means. Here, the period of the beat of the music output by the output unit is obtained by the obtaining unit. The timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined based on the lapse of time since the output of the music by the output means and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition means. Is determined by Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is emitted by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined here. Thus, the output of the music, the acquisition of the period of the beat of the output music, the determination of the timing of the beat of the output music, and the generation of the notification sound at the timing of the beat of the music based on the determination. Are performed in the sound control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing of the beat of the music can be accurately determined, and the notification sound can be notified in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music accurately determined.

  In the gaming machine A2, main control means for controlling a game, display control means for controlling display on the display means based on a command from the main control means, the output means, the determination means, and the sound generation. Sound control means for controlling sound output based on a command from the main control means and a command from the display control means, the display control means comprising: An output start determining unit that determines the start of the output of the music by the output unit based on a command from the control unit; and the output start determining unit determines that the output of the music by the output unit is started. Transmitting means for transmitting an instruction command for instructing the start of music output to the sound control means, and opening of the output by the instruction command transmitted by the transmitting means; Acquisition means for acquiring the period of the beat of the indicated music, and elapse of time since the transmission of the instruction command by the transmission unit, and the period of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition unit. Notification means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, and notifying the sound control means of the timing of the beat, wherein the determination means determines the timing of the music from the notification means. A gaming machine A4 for determining the timing of a beat of music output by the output means based on the notification of the timing of the beat.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means, and the display on the display means is controlled by the display control means based on a command from the main control means. Further, the output of the sound is controlled by the sound control means based on the command from the main control means and the command from the display control means. In the sound control means, the output of the sound is controlled based on the command from the display control means, so that the sound can be easily output in accordance with the image displayed on the display means. The sound control means has at least output means, determination means, and sound generation means. Here, in the display control means, the start of music output by the output means is determined by the output start determination means based on a command from the main control means. When the start of music output by the output means is determined by the output start determination means, an instruction command for instructing the start of music output is transmitted to the sound control means by the transmission means of the display control means. Further, a beat cycle of the music whose output is instructed by the instruction command transmitted by the transmission means is acquired by the acquisition means of the display control means. Then, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit is determined based on the lapse of time since the transmission of the instruction command by the transmission unit and the cycle of the beat of the music acquired by the acquisition unit. Then, the timing of the beat is notified to the sound control means by the notification means. The determination means of the sound control means determines the timing of the music beat output by the output means based on the notification of the timing of the music beat from the notification means. Then, the notification sound set by the setting means is emitted by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined here. In this way, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the display control means, and is notified to the sound control means, so that an image in accordance with the timing of the beat output by the output means is displayed on the display means. The notification sound can be generated at the timing of the beat while being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to output a notification sound in accordance with the rhythm of the BGM while showing the image to the player to the rhythm of the BGM. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game while putting on the rhythm of the music output by the output means through the video and the sound.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a bet amount setting unit for setting a predetermined game value as a bet amount is provided, and the predetermined starting condition is a state in which the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting unit. In this case, the starting operation means which can be operated by the player is operated on condition that the betting number is set by the betting number setting means. A gaming machine A5 for setting a notification sound for notifying a setting.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4. That is, in a state where the predetermined game value is set as the bet amount by the bet amount setting unit, the determination unit performs the determination as the predetermined start condition that the starting operation unit is operated by the player, and the identification information is set. Is dynamically executed by the dynamic display execution means. At this time, when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a notification sound for notifying the setting of the bet amount is set by the setting means. Thus, the set notification sound is emitted by the sounding means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means, that is, the fact that the bet amount is set is matched with the rhythm of the music. Since the player can be recognized by the notification sound that is pronounced, the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. In a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a game board and a game board provided on the game board Launching means for firing a game ball toward the game area, detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, and the detection means A payout unit that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to a player when the passage of the game balls in the predetermined area is detected, and an output unit that outputs music at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. Its out Means for judging the timing of the beat of the music output by the means, and notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means. Setting means for setting the sounding of the notification sound, and sounding means for sounding the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. A game ball is fired by a firing means toward a game area provided on a game board, and when the game ball passes a predetermined area provided in the game area, the detection means detects that the game ball has passed. Then, when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. Further, the music is output by the output means at least during a period in which the player plays the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. On the other hand, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, the sound of a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is emitted by the sound generator in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determiner. That is, when a game ball fired toward the game area passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, a notification sound for notifying the passing is provided at least during a period in which the player is playing a game. It is pronounced at the beat of the output music. As a result, the notification sound, which also means the payout of the game ball, is pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music. , The pleasure for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B1, the determining means determines, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, also the timing of the equally divided position when a plurality of beats are equally divided, The sounding means is the notification sound for which sound has been set by the setting means, and when the number of unsound notification sounds is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the position of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is determined. A gaming machine B2 wherein the notification sound is generated using timing.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts is determined by the determining means. If the notification sound is set to sound by the setting means and the number of unsound notification sounds is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the timing of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is also used. The notification sound is generated by the sound generation means. Thus, when a large number of game balls pass through a predetermined area of the game board, not only the timing of the musical beat but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is equally divided into sub-numbers. Is pronounced, so that a more complex rhythm can be carved by the notification sound. Therefore, the more complicated the rhythm is, the more the game ball passes through the predetermined area, that is, the more game balls are paid out. Therefore, by informing the player of the music output from the output means by informing a complex rhythm of the rhythm, the player can be informed that the payout of many game balls is performed while the rhythm allows the player to entertain. There is an effect that the notification can be easily made.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the establishment of the predetermined starting condition includes a case where the detection means detects the passage of a gaming ball in the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, so the determination means makes a determination, and based on the determination result, the identification information is displayed on the display means. Is executed by the dynamic display executing means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. As a result, the notification sound meaning not only the payout of the game ball but also the dynamic display of the identification information leading to the addition of the predetermined game value is pronounced in accordance with the rhythm of the music. By listening to the rhythm of the music, the sense of expectation for the game can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the detecting means is provided in the game area, and the area in which the game ball can pass only during a period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, A gaming machine B4, which detects the passing of the gaming ball when passing.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, when a game ball passes through an area provided in the game area and configured to allow the game ball to pass only during a period in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means. Is detected by Then, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in this area by the detection means, the sounding of a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball is set by the setting means. Then, the set notification sound is emitted by the sound generator in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determiner. As described above, in a period in which a predetermined game value is given to a player, when a game ball passes through an area configured to allow the game ball to pass only during that period, the notification sound is generated in accordance with the rhythm of music. Is done. The notification sound informs the passing of the game ball to the special area during the period in which the predetermined game value is given, so that the player can listen to the notification sound with joy while adjusting to the music rhythm. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be enhanced.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, at least a period during which a game is being played by the player in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to the player Output means for outputting music during the game, and sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event in response to the occurrence of an event caused by the progress of the game. Chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing to be performed, and, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means, the pitch of the notification sound to be emitted is determined. Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises a pitch determining means for constant, the.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Further, the music is output by the output means at least during a period in which the player plays the game. On the other hand, when an event occurs due to the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is generated by the sound generation unit. At this time, the code of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and based on the specified code, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means. Thus, the notification sound is not only generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also generated at a pitch corresponding to the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine C1, the pitch determining means determines the pitch of the notification sound to be emitted from constituent sounds constituting a chord specified by the chord specifying means. .

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, since the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specification means, the notification sound is formed by a chord with the chord of the music. It is pronounced at the pitch. Therefore, it is possible to play a pleasant melody composing the music and the chord by the notification sound, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the chord specified by the chord specifying means has been changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch determining means may generate the notification sound at the timing. A gaming machine C3 wherein a root sound of the chord is determined as a pitch.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, when the chord is specified by the chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at that timing is set as the pitch of the chord. The root sound is determined by the pitch determining means. If a pitch sound other than the root note of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat at which the music chord is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, and May feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by generating the notification sound having the root sound as the pitch, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed code. Therefore, there is an effect that a sound that is comfortable for the player can be heard.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the chord specifying unit may include the chord of the music at a timing at which the notification sound is generated before the timing of the generation of the notification, together with the chord of the music at the timing of the generation of the chord. And the chord of the music at a timing at which the notification sound is generated after the timing of the sound generation, and the pitch determining means determines that each of the codes specified by the chord specifying means is the same code. Yes, if the pitch of the notification sound generated before the timing of sound generation is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound generated at this timing. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, along with the music chord at the timing of sounding this time, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is generated before the timing of sounding, and the notification sound after the timing of sounding are generated. The chord of the music at a certain timing is specified by the chord specifying means. If each of the specified chords is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification tone generated before the timing of generating the chord is a constituent tone of the chord, the pitch of the notification tone generated at this timing is determined. The elapsed sound of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means as the pitch. This allows the notification sound to be pronounced while inserting the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord along with the notification sound whose pitch is the constituent sound of the music code, thereby providing the notification that accompanies the music. Variation can be given to the melody by sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the melody by the notification sound is not monotonous, and it is possible to perform the audio output that does not make the player tired.

  In the gaming machine C4, the pitch determining means may determine the pitch of the notification sound at a timing at which the notification sound is generated after the timing of the generation of the notification sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the pitch of the notification sound at the timing at which the notification sound is generated after the timing of the generation of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is set as the code configuration. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. Thus, the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is interposed between the notification sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord, so that the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated. Even if the melody is played by the notification sound, the melody played in the music code can be heard by the player without discomfort.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the pitch determining means may determine that each of the codes specified by the code specifying means is the same code, and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the timing of generating the sound is determined by the pitch. In the case of a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of a passing sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being calculated by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, the chords specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the chord of the music at the timing of sounding, the chord of the music at the timing of generating the notification sound before the timing of sounding, and the timing of the sounding Also, when the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is made later is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound that was generated before the timing at which this sound is generated is a constituent sound of the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music, the pitch determining means calculates the pitch of the elapsed sound as the pitch of the notification sound generated at this timing. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a table for determining the elapsed sound in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the previously pronounced constituent sound, and the key of the music in order to determine the elapsed sound. Therefore, a memory area for storing the table is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a game board, a firing means for shooting a game ball toward a game area provided on the game board, and a game ball provided in a predetermined area provided in the game area. Detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball when passing, and payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. Wherein the sounding means sounds a notification sound for notifying the passing of the game ball in the predetermined area based on the detection of the passing of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detecting means. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6. That is, when a game ball is fired by the firing means toward the game area provided on the game board, and when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. You. Then, when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player by the payout means. Further, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area is generated by the sound generation means. At this time, the code of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and based on the specified code, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means. Thus, each time a game ball passes through a predetermined area where a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out by the payout means, the notification sound is emitted at a pitch matching the chord progression of music. Therefore, the melody that matches the chord progression of the music played by the notification sound has the effect that the player can further increase the joy of paying out the game balls.

  Determining means for determining the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, and notifying the occurrence of the event triggered by the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game Setting means for setting sounding of the notification sound, wherein the sounding means sounds the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determining means. C8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. Further, when an event that occurs due to the progress of the game occurs, the setting unit sets the sounding of a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event. Then, the set notification sound is emitted by the sound generator in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determiner. That is, the notification sound is generated at least at the timing of the beat of the music output during the period in which the player plays the game. As a result, the melody corresponding to the rhythm and chord of the music is played by the notification sound, so that the player can enjoy the game more easily.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, at least a period during which a game is being played by the player in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to the player Output means for outputting music during the display, and display control for controlling display of a new image, stop of the image, or deletion of the image on the display means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Here, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. Display of a new image, stop of the image, or deletion of the image is controlled by the display control unit in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit. That is, a new image is displayed on the display unit in synchronization with the rhythm of the music output by the output unit, and the image is stopped or the image is deleted. Thereby, since the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized in accordance with the rhythm of the music, the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, thereby increasing the interest in the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine D1, the display control means performs the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means at least once in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine D2, which performs control to stop and display the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, the display control means controls the pseudo display of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means at least once in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Done. Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player, for example, in such a manner that the dynamic display of the identification information, while repeating the pseudo stop display, for example, increasing the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit, together with the rhythm of the music, In conjunction with the rhythm of music, it is possible to enhance the interest in games. In this way, the dynamic display of the identification information can be given to the player as if it were performed in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that a rhythmical game can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved. There is an effect that can be.

  Setting means for setting a sound to be emitted in accordance with display of a new image performed by the display means, stop of the image, or deletion of the image under the control of the display control means in the gaming machine D1 or D2; A sound generating means for generating the sound set by the setting means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output from the output means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, under the control of the display control means, the sound to be emitted in accordance with the display of a new image, the stop of the image, or the deletion of the image performed by the display means is set by the setting means. Then, the set sound is emitted by the sounding means in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music output from the output means. In this way, not only is a new image displayed on the display unit, the image is stopped, or the image is erased, but also the sound corresponding to it is output in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit. The sound is generated according to the timing of the beat of the music output by the means. Therefore, in addition to visually recognizing the image displayed on the display means in accordance with the rhythm of the music, it is possible to listen to the sound together, so that the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, This has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, at least a period during which a game is being played by the player in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to the player Output means for outputting music therein, wherein the dynamic display execution means does not allow the identification information to be visually recognized in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine E1 comprising a start means for starting a state.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Here, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. In accordance with the timing of the beat of the outputted music, the start means starts the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player so as to start at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be played in a sense that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed according to the music rhythm. Can be made. Therefore, the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, which has an effect of increasing interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the start means may change the identification information from the start timing to the timing of the beat of the music. A gaming machine E2 that dynamically displays the identification information in a visually recognizable state and starts a state in which the identification information is not visually recognizable in the dynamic display of the identification information in synchronization with the beat of the music.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, when the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a visible state from the start timing to the timing of the beat of the music. The start means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so as to start the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information in synchronization with the beat timing. Thereby, even if the start timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the player is as if the dynamic display of the identification information was started in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music. Can be shown. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to feel as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed according to the rhythm of the music.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the dynamic display execution unit includes a stop display execution unit that executes a stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information in accordance with a timing of a beat of music output by the output unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, the stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the stop display executing means in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the timing of the beat of the music. You can let the player. Therefore, the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, which has an effect of increasing interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine E3, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the beat timing of the music, the stop display executing means dynamically displays the identification information at the beat of the music. Gaming machine E4, in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a state where the identification information is visually recognizable, and then the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. .

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3. That is, when the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the dynamic display of the identification information is pseudo stop-displayed at the timing of the beat of the music, and then the identification information is visually recognized. After the dynamic display in the possible state, the stop display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information so that the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. Thereby, even if the stop display timing of the dynamic display of the identification information is different from the timing of the beat of the music, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music. You can make it look as if it were. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to feel as if the dynamic display of the identification information is performed according to the rhythm of the music.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the invisible state of the identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information, which is started by the start means in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, A gaming machine E5 characterized in that identification information is dynamically displayed at high speed.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the high-speed dynamic display of the identification information is started by the start means in synchronization with the timing of the beat of the music. Therefore, the dynamic display of the identification information can be shown to the player so as to start at the timing of the beat of the music, and the dynamic display of the identification information can be played in a sense that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed according to the music rhythm. Can be made. Therefore, the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, which has an effect of increasing interest in the game.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to the player, operating means that can be operated by the player, An operation detecting means for detecting that the operating means has been operated, an output means for outputting music at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player, and judging timing of a beat of the music outputted by the output means And a setting means for setting a sound of a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means. When the gaming machine F1, characterized in that it comprises the notification sound that has been set by the setting means, and a sound generating means for sound in accordance with the timing of beat the music that has been determined by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Further, operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. The timing of the beat of the music output by the output means is determined by the determination means. Here, based on the detection of the operation of the operation unit by the operation detection unit, the sounding of a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is set by the setting unit. Then, the set notification sound is emitted by the sound generator in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music determined by the determiner. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the notification sound is generated at the timing of the beat of the music. This allows the player to enjoy the game by listening to the notification sound while riding on the rhythm of the music. In addition, the user can enjoy the operation of the operation means to listen to the notification sound on the rhythm of the music, and can positively operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine F1, the determination means determines, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts, The sounding means is the notification sound for which sound has been set by the setting means, and when the number of unsound notification sounds is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the position of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is determined. A gaming machine F2 wherein the notification sound is generated using timing.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, in addition to the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is divided into a plurality of equal parts is determined by the determining means. If the notification sound is set to sound by the setting means and the number of unsound notification sounds is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the timing of the equally divided position determined by the determination means is also used. Then, the notification sound is made to sound by the sounding means. Thus, when the operation of the operating means by the player is performed a plurality of times at short intervals, not only the timing of the musical beat but also the timing of the equally divided position when the beat is subdivided into equal parts However, since the notification sound is emitted, a more complicated rhythm can be carved by the notification sound. Therefore, by informing the player of the music by the rhythm of the notification sound, the player can enjoy the rhythm of the music output from the output means. Has the effect that the operating means can be operated by the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sound generating means includes: a code specifying means for specifying a code of the music at a timing of generating the sound; and a sound of the notification sound to be generated based on the code specified by the code specifying means. A gaming machine F3 comprising: a pitch determining means for determining a pitch.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the code of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and based on the specified code, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means. Thus, the notification sound is not only generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also generated at a pitch corresponding to the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased. Further, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means to listen to the melody.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to the player, operating means that can be operated by the player, An operation detection unit that detects that the operation unit has been operated, an output unit that outputs music at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player, and an operation of the operation unit detected by the operation detection unit Sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed, and the sounding means includes a sound source for the music at the timing of sounding. Gaming machine F4, comprising: a code specifying means for specifying a code; and a pitch determining means for determining a pitch of the notification sound to be emitted based on the code specified by the code specifying means. .

  According to the gaming machine F4, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Further, operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation means is operated, the operation is detected by the operation detection means. On the other hand, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. Then, based on the detection of the operation of the operation unit by the operation detection unit, a notification sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is generated by the sound generation unit. At this time, the code of the music at the timing when the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying means, and based on the specified code, the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means. Thus, the notification sound is not only generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music, but also generated at a pitch corresponding to the chord progression of the music. Therefore, a melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased. Further, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means to listen to the melody.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the pitch determining means determines a pitch of the notification sound to be emitted from constituent sounds constituting a chord specified by the chord specifying means. Machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines F3 or F4. That is, since the pitch of the notification sound to be generated is determined by the pitch determination means from among the constituent sounds constituting the chord specified by the chord specification means, the notification sound is simply generated in accordance with the rhythm of the music. Not only are they pronounced at the pitch at which the chords and chords of the music are formed. Therefore, it is possible to play a pleasant melody composing the music and the chord by the notification sound, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F5, when the chord specified by the chord specifying means has been changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch determining means causes the pitch to be generated at that timing. A gaming machine F6, wherein a root sound of the chord is determined as a pitch of the notification sound.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F3 to F6. That is, when the chord is specified by the chord specifying means, if the specified chord is changed to a new chord at that timing, the pitch of the notification sound to be sounded at that timing is set as the pitch of the chord. The root sound is determined by the pitch determining means. If a pitch sound other than the root note of the chord is output as a notification sound at the timing of the beat at which the music chord is changed, the player recognizes the notification sound as a sound deviating from the chord, and May feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player stops operating the operation means. On the other hand, by generating the notification sound having the root sound as the pitch, the player can hear the notification sound as a sound that matches the changed code. Therefore, there is an effect that a sound that is comfortable for the player can be heard.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the chord specifying unit may include the chord of the music at a timing at which the notification sound is generated prior to the timing of the generation of the notification sound, together with the chord of the music at the timing of the generation. And the chord of the music at a timing at which the notification sound is generated after the timing of the sound generation, and the pitch determining means determines that each of the codes specified by the chord specifying means is the same code. Yes, if the pitch of the notification sound generated before the timing of sound generation is the constituent sound of the chord, the elapsed sound of the chord is determined as the pitch of the notification sound generated at this timing. A gaming machine F7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F3 to F6. That is, along with the music chord at the timing of sounding this time, the music chord at the timing when the notification sound is generated before the timing of sounding, and the notification sound after the timing of sounding are generated. The chord of the music at a certain timing is specified by the chord specifying means. If each of the specified chords is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification tone generated before the timing of generating the chord is a constituent tone of the chord, the pitch of the notification tone generated at this timing is determined. The elapsed sound of the chord is determined by the pitch determining means as the pitch. This allows the notification sound to be emitted while inserting the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord, with the notification sound whose pitch is the component sound of the chord of the music while being synchronized with the rhythm of the music. Thus, the melody of the notification sound accompanied by music can have a variation. Therefore, there is an effect that the melody by the notification sound is not monotonous, and it is possible to perform the audio output that does not make the player tired.

  In the gaming machine F7, the pitch determination means determines the pitch of the notification sound at a timing at which the notification sound is generated later than the timing of the generation of the notification sound having the elapsed sound as the pitch. A gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the pitch of the notification sound at the timing at which the notification sound is generated after the timing of the generation of the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound is set as a code. The sound is determined by the pitch determining means. Thus, the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is interposed between the notification sounds whose pitch is the constituent sound of the chord, so that the notification sound whose pitch is the elapsed sound of the chord is generated. Even if the melody is played by the notification sound, the melody played in the music code can be heard by the player without discomfort.

  In the gaming machine F7 or F8, the pitch determination means may determine that each of the codes specified by the code specification means is the same code, and the pitch of the notification sound generated before the timing of sound generation is determined by the pitch. In the case of a constituent sound of a chord, the pitch of a passing sound is calculated as the pitch of the notification sound to be generated at this timing based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music. A gaming machine F9 characterized by being calculated by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7 or F8. That is, the chords specified by the chord specifying means, that is, the chord of the music at the timing of sounding, the chord of the music at the timing of generating the notification sound before the timing of sounding, and the timing of the sounding Also, when the chord of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is made later is the same chord, and the pitch of the notification sound that was generated before the timing at which this sound is generated is a constituent sound of the chord, Based on the chord, the pitch of the constituent sound, and the main tone of the music, the pitch determining means calculates the pitch of the elapsed sound as the pitch of the notification sound generated at this timing. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a table for determining the elapsed sound in association with the chord of the music, the pitch of the previously pronounced constituent sound, and the key of the music in order to determine the elapsed sound. Therefore, a memory area for storing the table is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. A movable character that operates based on the progress of a game in a gaming machine that provides a player with a predetermined game value when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means. Driving means for driving the movable role, output means for outputting music at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player, and timing of the beat of the music output by the output means, A game machine G1 comprising: drive control means for controlling drive means so that the movable accessory operates.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution unit on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. In addition, a movable accessory that operates based on the progress of the game is provided, and the movable accessory is driven by the driving unit. Here, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. The drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit so that the movable accessory operates in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output unit. Accordingly, the movable role moves in accordance with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, a light emitting device that lights or flashes based on the progress of the game in a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player Means, output means for outputting music at least during a period in which a game is being played by the player, and the light emitting means is turned on or flashed in accordance with the timing of the beat of the music output by the output means. A gaming machine G2 comprising: a light emission control unit for controlling the light emission control unit.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. In addition, a light emitting unit that lights or blinks based on the progress of the game is provided. Here, the music is output by the output unit at least during a period in which the player plays the game. The light emission control unit controls the light emission unit to light or blink in accordance with the timing of the music beat output by the output unit. Thus, the light-emitting means is turned on or off in synchronization with the rhythm of the music, so that the player can play the game on the rhythm of the music, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, at least a period during which a game is being played by the player in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to the player Output means for outputting music during the game, and sounding means for sounding a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event when the occurrence of the event caused by the progress of the game is triggered. Key specifying means for specifying the key of the music output by the means, chord specifying means for specifying the chord of the music at the timing of its sounding, Ri and code specified, the keynote based on the keynote specified by the specifying means, a game machine H1 to the pitch determining means for determining a tone pitch of the alarm sound to the sound, comprising: a.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the determination is performed by the determination unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit based on the determination result. You. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, thereby giving interest to the player. Further, the music is output by the output means at least during a period in which the player plays the game. On the other hand, when an event occurs due to the progress of the game, a notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the event is generated by the sound generation unit. At this time, the main tone of the music output by the output unit is specified by the main key specifying unit, and the code of the music at the timing at which the notification sound is generated is specified by the code specifying unit. Then, based on the specified chord and the key tone of the music, the pitch of the notification sound to be emitted is determined by the pitch determining means. Thus, the notification sound is generated at a pitch that matches the chord progression in accordance with the scale determined by the key tone of the music, so that the melody that matches the music is played by the notification sound. Therefore, there is an effect that interest in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine H1, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the key specified by the key specifying means, the pitch determining means determines the pitch from the relation between the main tone of the main key and the chord. A gaming machine H2 that calculates the pitch of the notification sound according to a scale determined by a key tone.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1. That is, based on the chord specified by the chord specifying means and the key specified by the key specifying means, the pitch of the notification sound is changed according to the scale determined by the key, based on the relationship between the main key of the main key and the chord. It is calculated by the high determination means. The pitch can be determined by the calculation in this way because the pitch determined according to the key tone set for the music only changes the pitch of the key tone of the key tone. Is always constant. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a table for determining the pitch, and a memory area for storing the table is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine I1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine I2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B4, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1, G2, H1, and H2, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being fused. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as a variable effect (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-046635). The fluctuating effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters (a starting prize) a ball at an entrance (starting opening). A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed, the symbols and the like displayed based on predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stopped symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. If you have a jackpot. While such an effect is being performed, the background music (Back Ground Music: BGM) is output from the gaming machine, further enhancing the interest of the game.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the background music is merely flowing from the speaker, and for the player, the background music is less likely to be interesting, which is useful for improving the game ssss. There was a situation that there was no.
The present technical idea is made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by using at least music output during a period in which the game is being performed. It is intended to be.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
60 game board 64 1st entrance (detection means)
65a Special winning opening (detection means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
87 1st character (movable character)
87a Motor for vertical movement of first accessory (drive means)
87e 1st role rotation motor (drive means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
111 Payout control device (payout means)
112a Ball launching unit (firing means)
113 sound lamp control device (sound control means, drive control means, light emission control means)
114 display control device (dynamic display execution means, display control means)
227 Lamp display device (light emitting means)
S1207 Change start processing (determination means)
S1907 (setting means, operation detecting means)
S2010 (setting means)
S2121 (judgment means)
S2129 (setting means)
S2131 (Sound generation means)
S2135 Start winning prize sound output processing (sound generating means)
S2137 Frame button operation sound output processing (sound generation means)
S2144 (output means)
S2145 (acquisition means)
S2161, S2171, S2177 (code specifying means)
S2159, S2161, S2164 (pitch determination means)
S2174, S2177 (pitch determination means)
S3611 (output start determination means)
S3612 (transmission means)
S3613 (acquisition means)
S3616 (Notification means)
S3807 (output means)
S4001 (judgment means)
S4203 (acquisition means)
S4206 (Notification means)
S4401, S4402 (pitch determination means)

Claims (1)

Determining means for making a determination when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and dynamic display executing means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information based on a result of the determination by the determining means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the means, in a gaming machine for giving a predetermined game value to a player,
Game board,
Firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area provided on the game board,
When a game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area, a detection unit that detects the passage of the game ball,
When the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player;
Output means for outputting music at least during a period when a game is being played by the player;
Determining means for determining the rhythm of the music output by the output means;
Based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area by the detection means, setting means for setting the sound of a notification sound for notifying the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area,
When the gaming state is in a predetermined gaming state, sounding means for sounding the notification sound set by the setting means in accordance with the rhythm of the music determined by the determining means, and Gaming machine to do.

Images